Printed Version of NVNA Help File Supports A Keysight PNA-X Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA)

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Printed Version of NVNA Help File Supports A Keysight PNA-X Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA)"

Transcription

1 Printed Version of NVNA Help File Supports A Keysight PNA-X Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA)

2 Table of Contents NVNA Online Help What's New... 9 NVNA Overview System Configuration X-Parameter Measurements Measurement Class General NVNA Envelope Mixer / Converter Setup Mixer Measurement Multitone Multitone Measurements Multitone Source Frequency Setup Dialog Multitone Hardware Configuration Coupling a Fundamental Frequency to a Swept Variable Understanding the Multitone Measurement Display Setup Multitone Measurement using External Multitone Source Setup Multitone Measurement using Internal Sources Stimulus Settings Source and Receiver Attenuation Trigger Setup and Averaging Port 1 Bypass Switch Limit Measurement BW External Source Configuration Pulse Measurements High Power Pulse Measurements Variable Configuration Dialog Source Out1 Low Band Mode RF On Delay Power Limit Response Settings Measurement Class

3 Calibration Configure a Power Meter As Receiver Fixture De-embedding Display Menu Group Delay Scale Receiver Attenuation Receiver Path Port-1 Reference Mixer Phase Normalization Couple Segments Customize Parameters Setup 2-Port Cal for 1-Port Measurements Load Control Measurements Load Pull Options ALC Instrument Configuration Load Pull using ALC Software and Maury Tuners Load Pull Using NVNA with ATS Utilities Settings Instrument Control Preset and User Preset Phase Reference Setup Preferences S2P File Reversal and Cascading Analysis Topics X-Parameters Markers S-Parameters Programming Getting Started with COM/DCOM NVNA Object Model File Save and Recall Using NVNA with ATS

4 NVNA Measurement Order Addenda Envelope Hardware Configuration General Hardware Configuration Mixer Hardware Configuration Procedures AddSegment Method Application Object ApplySetup Method Attenuator Property AttenuatorMode Property CalPower Property CoupledSegmentsEnabled Property DeembedEnabled Property DeembedInterpolated Property Domain Property EnvGateDelay Property EnvGateWidth Property EnvIFBW Property EnvNumHarmonics Property EnvPRF Property EnvPulseDelay Property EnvPulseWidth Property EnvSourceFreq Property EnvSourcePower Property EnvTimeStart Property EnvTimeStep Property EnvTimeStop Property GenerateXParamFromFiles Method GetEnvComplex Method GetEnvData Method GetErrorTerm Method GetErrorTermFreqSet Method

5 GetExtMeasData Method GetFreqSet Method GetGenData Method GetHarmonicsNum Method GetIFBW Method GetMultitoneData Method GetMultitoneData2 Method GetNumFreq Method GetNumHarmonics Method GetNumPowers Method GetPowerSet Method GetPowerSweepDomain Method GetStartFreq Method GetStartPower Method GetStopFreq Method GetStopPower Method GetXparameter Method IDString Property IsCalValid Method LaunchCalWizard Method LimitMeasurementBandwidth Method Measure Method MeasureAsync Method MeasureAsyncCancel Method MeasureCompleted Event MeasureIsCompleted Property MeasurementConfiguration Method PathConfiguration Property PhaseSourceEnabled Property PortsPowerOff Method Preset Method PutErrorTerm Method Quit Event

6 Quit Method Recall Method ReceiverAttenuator Property ReferenceImpedance Property RemoveSegment Method RemoveSweptVariable Method Save Method SavePHDFile Method SaveXMeas Method SaveXparameter Method SetALCMode Method SetDeembed Method SetETHarmonics Method SetETLevel Method SetETPhases Method SetIFBW Method SetPhaseSource Method SetPower Method SetSegment Method SetSweptVariable Method Show Method SourceOn Property SourcePower Property SparameterEnabled Property Visible Property XparameterEnabled Property CPlus Example VBScript Example AddFund Method AddLinearSweepVar Method AddLogSweepVar Method AddPointSweepVar Method AddSource Method

7 AddSweepSeg Method GetIFBW Method GetMaxHarmOrder Method GetMaxMixOrder Method GetNumFunds Method GetNumSegs Method GetNumSources Method GetNumVars Method GetVarName Method InsertFund Method InsertSource Method MaxMixOrder Property MeasurementConfiguration_Object RemoveFund Method RemoveSource Method RemoveSweepSeg Method RemoveVar Method RemoveVar2 Method SetCoupledSweep Method SetExternalSource Method SetFundFreq Method SetIFBW Method SetInternalSource Method SetMaxHarmOrder Method SetMaxMixOrder Method SetMixFreq Method SetMultitoneFreq Method SetPowerMode Method SetPowerSeg Method SetSweepSeg Method SetTonePhase Method SetTonePower Method SourceOn Method

8 SourceOnAfterMeasurement Property AcquisitionDelay Property AcquisitionWindow Property Delay pulse Property Invert Property NoiseBandwidth Property Period Property PulseGenerator Object PulseSettingsApplicable Method State pulse Property Width Property

9 What's New Rev A (May 2017) Sweep total powers (multitone measurements) Sweep power per tone (multitone measurements) Load Control using Maury ATS Software and Maury Tuners - Option 520 (N524xA) S94520A (N524xB) Load Control using Keysight Arbitrary Load Control Software, and Maury Tuners - Option 521 (N524xA) S94521A (N524xB) Rev A (Sept 2016) Automatic source power reduction during calibration External instrument configuration SMU setup Cascade S2P files Reverse S2P file Backward compatibility preference for Maury ATS Rev A (Sept 2015) Windows 7 PNA-Xs (minimum Windows 7 firmware is A.10.01) Setup 2-Port Cal for 1-Port Measurements Rev A (May 2013) The changes require PNA firmware A or higher. Hi Isolation General Class Configurations Rev A (December 2012) Pulse Profile Measurements Enhanced Receiver Amplitude Calibration Rev. A (November 2011) Support for 67 GHz PNA-X Pulse Measurements Phase Reference Source connected with GPIB, LAN, or USB Save Traces to *.csv Files 9

10 Group Delay Format and Aperture Setting On-Wafer Cal Preferences Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch Source on/off after measurement (General Meas class) S-parameter Power Dialog Source Power Cal enhancements Rev. A (March 2011) Measurement Classes Mixer / Converter (3-port) Measurements Multitone Measurements New Response Menu UI Display Windows Calibrations Cal Power dialog Manage Cal Set dialog Expanded Variable Configuration dialog Distortion Parameters Rev. A (Feb. 2009) Using NVNA with Maury Automatic Tuning System Enhanced Phase Normalization Use Intermediate Files New Programming Commands 10

11 NVNA Overview When installed on the 4-port PNA-X, the Nonlinear Network Analyzer Application provides Vector and Amplitude/Phase Corrected Nonlinear measurements from 10 MHz up to 67 GHz depending on your PNA-X model. Learn more about NVNA in the latest brochure (Internet connection required) Requirements: 1. A PNA-X with the following: 1. Opt ports Opt port attenuators & bias tees Opt 080 (N524xA) S93080A (N524xB) - Frequency Offset Mode Opt Source switching & combining network - required for Opt 514 (N524xA) S94514A (N524xB) Firmware revision A or later. 2. An Keysight Power meter/sensor with adequate frequency and power coverage. 3. A VNA Cal Kit that matches the DUT connectors. 4. Keysight U9391C Phase Reference (2 each) 5. A PSG, ESG, or MXG external source to drive the Phase Reference - required for Opt 514 (N524xA) S94514A (N524xB); recommended for Opt 510 (N524xA) S94510A (N524xB) and Opt 518 (N524xA) S94518A (N524xB) NVNA Options To view the options that are installed, close the NVNA and start the PNA. Click Help, then About Network Analyzer. How NVNA Works The nonlinear vector network analyzer application runs on the PNA-X, leveraging the existing firmware and hardware as the measurement engine. With standard PNA-X hardware, unratioed phase can NOT be measured. As the instrument LO is swept, the LO phase at each frequency step is not consistent from sweep to sweep, as shown in the following image. 11

12 For visual purposes, two sweeps are overlaid in a yellow and blue trace. You can see that at about 2 GHz (red line) the phase begins to shift. This shows that the LO phase not only changes from sweep to sweep, but also within a sweep from one point to the next. This prevents measurement of the cross-frequency phase of the frequency spectra. Instead, the incident and reflected a and b waves are ratioed against a harmonic phase reference that has a constant phase relationship versus frequency and from sweep to sweep. The harmonic phase reference is used to generate all the frequency spectrum simultaneously with a time domain impulse. Fourier theory illustrates that a repetitive impulse in time generates a spectra of frequency content related to the pulse repetition frequency (PRF) and pulse width (PW). When the phase reference input is driven with a frequency F(in), we see n*f(in) at the output. For example: To measure a DUT response to a 1 GHz input signal out the 5th harmonic, F(in) = 1 GHz is used as the phase reference input. This will generate phase reference spectra at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 GHz enabling the cross-frequency phase measurement of the DUT to the 5th harmonic. The input and output waves from a two port device are measured. Calibration and error correction provide the means to get an accurate representation of the device characteristics. By measuring the absolute amplitude and cross-frequency phase we have knowledge of the nonlinear behavior such that we can: Convert to time domain waveforms. Accurately measure nonlinear performance. Generate model coefficients. Measure phase relationships between harmonics. General VNA Block Diagram 12

13 13

14 Last Modified: 22-Sep Dec Apr-2009 Updated option numbers Linked to options in brochure. Replaced N5242A with any PNA-X model 5-Feb-2009 Added Opt Apr-2008 New topic 14

15 System Configuration Hardware Configuration General Hardware Configuration Envelope Hardware Configuration Mixer Hardware Configuration Multitone Hardware Configuration External Instruments Phase Reference Setup - Used to establish a connection with an External RF Source to be used with the Phase Reference. External Source Configuration - Used to establish a connection, and if necessary, modify commands that are sent between the PNA-X and External RF Sources. Instrument Control - Used to establish communication and set sweep variables with instruments such as DC Bias, Temperature Control, and Voltmeters. Use this dialog with the Variable Configuration dialog. See Also High Power Pulse Measurements PNA-X Path Configurator Port Bypass Switches Last Modified: 29-Apr-2008 New topic 15

16 X-Parameter Measurements In this topic: Overview X-Parameter Configuration X-Parameter Display Simulating with X-parameters X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems References *X-parameters is a trademark and registered trademark of Keysight Technologies in the US, EU, JP, and elsewhere. The X-parameters format and underlying equations are open and documented. For more information, visit Overview X-parameters are a rigorous, mathematically-correct linearization of device under test (DUT) behavior as represented by a spectral map from incident to scattered pseudo-waves. Unlike classic S-parameters, which capture only linear device behavior and ignore nonlinear behavior such as harmonic/intermod generation and even same-frequency higher order mixing effects, X-parameters capture linear device behavior and linearize nonlinear behavior about a large signal operating point (LSOP). This is achieved by stimulating the DUT with one or more large tones at one or more ports (defining the LSOP) and, while the large signal(s) are still present, injecting additional small 'extraction' tones at all ports, at all tones of interest separately. At least two phase-offset small tones must be injected at each port/frequency of interest in order to extract the corresponding X-parameters. All resulting waves are measured for each stimulus, and the X-parameters are solved for directly (if only two phases are used) or using regression (in the case of 3 or more phases). See Also X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems Notation and Equations for Multiport / Multitone X-parameters (pdf) X-Parameter Configuration How to configure X-Parameters: 16

17 Click Analysis, then Configure X-Parameters X-parameter Configuration appears as a tab in the Multitone Measurement Configuration dialog. This allows you to configure nearly all Multitone settings from this single dialog. Check Enable to turn ON X-Parameter extraction. Enable is NOT available under the following conditions: When S-parameters are enabled. First disable S-parameters by clicking Analysis, then S-Parameters and clear the check. When both internal sources are NOT available for X-Parameters. On the Measurement Configuration dialog, change Hardware Setup or Reference Source so that both internal sources are available for X-parameter measurements. Measurement Class is Envelope. X-Parameters are NOT available with Envelope measurements. Click Extract X-parameters from Intermediate Files to perform X-parameter extraction from large files that were saved to disk rather than use internal memory. Learn how to enable Use Intermediate Files. Select the files to extract in either.xnp or.phd format. X-Parameter Measurement Configuration dialog box help The Extraction tones always use Source 2 in the PNA-X, routed to the appropriate DUT port. Maximum Harmonic/Mixing Order This setting defines the highest harmonic or mixing order at which Extraction Tones (ETs) will be injected into the DUT for XS and XT extraction. For example, if the first seven harmonics of a DUT are desired but only the first 3 harmonic load conditions have a significant affect on DUT behavior, setting this to 3 and setting Maximum Harmonic/Mixing Order to 7 results in XF terms being measured up to the seventh harmonic but XS and XT terms only being measured up to the third harmonic. Eliminating unneeded terms speeds up both measurement and simulation. 17

18 This setting is different from the Max Harmonics/Max Order settings on the General, Multitone, and Mixer Measurement setup dialogs. X-parameters use the Max Harmonics and Mixing Order settings on the General, Multitone, and Mixer setup dialogs to determine where to measure the X F terms (capturing large signal response). This setting relates to the X S and X T terms that capture the small-signal sensitivity. Different settings may be desired for the following reasons: Bandwidth limitations on external amplifiers - Measuring the small-signal sensitivity requires extraction tones, while measuring the large signal response only requires tuning the receiver to an additional frequency. Limiting measurement time/model complexity - The number of X F terms and measurements is linearly proportional to the number of harmonics and mixing products, while the number of X S and X T terms grows exponentially. Often people are interested in measuring high-order harmonics and mixing products without being interested in the sensitivity to mismatch or stimulus. Number of Phase Offset ETs Although two phases are sufficient to allow X-parameter extraction, using additional phases improves both the accuracy and robustness of the extraction. When used with PNA-X firmware A.09.33, a setting of four phases is recommended to provide robust X-parameter extraction in most measurement configurations. However, more phases require more measurement time. Extraction Tone (ET) Level The level of the extraction tone must be small enough to ensure a spectrally-linear response, but large enough to ensure that the response is measurable. A Source Power Cal is performed and both the LSOP and Extraction tones power levels are adjusted to compensate for loss, external amplifiers, and attenuators. Select the method used to set the ET Power Level: The goal of both of the automatic ET Level methods is to determine the largest LSOP signal to appear at the cal reference plane. The Extraction tone is then set 16 db below that level. Automatic ET Level - Gain Based This setting is generally best if the DUT is NOT in hard compression. In hard compression, extraction signal may be low at lower drive levels. The ET level is set 16 db below the LSOP based on the stimulus power and the DUT gain. Port 2 Gain at Max Input Power Enter the DUT gain at the highest stimulus (port 1) power. Port 1 stimulus power is set in various dialogs depending on the Measurement class. Use negative values for Mixers which have conversion loss. Automatic ET Level - Power Based The ET level is set 16 db below the larger of the following power levels: 18

19 The stimulus power which is specified on the setup dialog appropriate for each Meas Class. The Maximum Output Power specified on this dialog. For example: At port 1 (DUT input) suppose the max stimulus power level into the DUT is -10 dbm. If you know the reflection coefficient of port 1 to be -30 db, and there is no component inside the DUT that will generate power out the DUT input, then set the Port 1 Max Output power to -40 dbm. The higher of the two signals is -10 dbm. The extraction level for port 1 is set to 16 db below that value, or -26 dbm. At port 2 (DUT output) you know that the DUT gain at the stimulus power (-10 dbm) is 12 db. Then set the Port 2 Max Output power to +2 dbm. The higher power level (of the INPUT stimulus power of -10 dbm and output of +2 dbm) is +2. The extraction level for port 2 is set to 16 db below +2, or -14 dbm. For Mixers - At port 2 (MUT output) you know that the conversion loss at the stimulus power (-10 dbm) is -2 db. Then set the Port 2 Max Output power to -12 dbm. The higher power level (of the INPUT stimulus power of -10 dbm and output of -12 dbm) is -10 dbm. The extraction level for port 2 is set to 16 db below -10, or -26 dbm. Manual ET Level Manually specify the ET level (advanced users only). Port 1 / 2 ET Level Level of ET to be used at each port. The ports that are available depend on the number of ports being measured. In mixer or 3-port mode, Port 3 is also available. In 1-port mode, only port 1 is available. Stimulus power is set at the following dialog boxes for each Meas Class: Meas Class General Multitone Mixer Stimulus power setting Config Dialog Source Power Tab Meas Config Dialog Port Labels Create a label for each DUT. Select a port, type a label, then click in the Port Labels field to update the text. Port labels are stored in the file, and help the user of the file understand the purpose of each port. Mixer extraction tone option: The LO input is usually driven into saturation and therefore tends to not be very sensitive to small changes in mismatch. Extracting X-parameters on the LO port of the mixer requires an external combiner and possibly an external amplifier for the ET. Because of these two factors, a switch to only capture the XF term on the LO port is provided. This can simplify the measurement setup as well as the total measurement time. The user will need to evaluate is reasonable option for their specific DUT. 19

20 X-Parameter Display How to display X-parameters: With a General, Multitone, or Mixer/Converter measurement configured: Click Response, then Measure, then X-Parameters Quad Display X-parameters can be plotted in log-magnitude, linear-magnitude, phase, real part, or imaginary part vs. frequency or power. They can also be plotted in polar format as functions of either power or frequency with the real part on the X axis and the imaginary part on the Y axis. Understanding the display results First, let's describe two X-parameters: X S pq and X T pq. These two terms relate the incident and scattered waves at the two selected port-tone combinations of interest (labeled p and q) as follows: Δbpq represents the change in the DUT s scattered wave bp due to the phase-normalized incident wave aq. As in S-parameters, the first subscript (p in the example above) is associated with the response signal, and the second subscript (q in the example above) is associated with the incident signal. But because the DUT is driven simultaneously with a large signal, the small signal mixes with the large signal to create cross-frequency contributions, making tone indexing necessary in addition to port indexing. For single-tone measurements, the tone is identified by the harmonic index. For two-tone measurements, the tone is identified 20

21 by its mixing indices. For example, 2,-1 identifies the tone at frequency 2*fund_1-1*fund_2. So, both the p and q terms are described by a Port and Tone combination, as shown highlighted in the following dialog: In the (Port, Tone) field: p (2,1) means port 2, tone 1 (fundamental) frequency q (2,2) means port 2, tone 2 frequency The X-parameter display shows eight terms relating the port-tone combinations p and q. XF Terms How to view XF terms: Click Response, then Measure, then Device Parameters, then Xf Parameter In addition to X S and X T there is an X F term. It is the component of the output due to the large signal input (a11), so is indexed only to the receive port tone X F p. For each possible selection of p, there is exactly one X F term. So in total there are 13 X-parameters for each possible (port, tone) selection of p,. For example, for p=(2,1), and assuming 3 tones of interest: X F 21 21

22 (X S 21,11),(X T 21,11) (X S 21,12), (X T 21,12) (X S 21,13), (X T 21,13) (X S 21,21), (X T 21,21) (X S 21,22), (X T 21,22) (X S 21,23), (X T 21,23) For a 2-port device, with 3 tones of interest at each port, there are 6 possible (port, harm) combinations for p. Each combination yields 13 parameters, for a total of 6*13 = 78 X-parameters measured. In order to make it easy to view and understand all of these terms, eight related XS and XT terms are displayed at a time on four separate plots as shown on the dialog box above. XF terms correspond closely to the measured waves B1 and B2 (assuming reasonable load match). Simulating with X-parameters Although subsets of X-parameters can be useful design tools on their own, their true predictive power comes from using the entire set together. Since the X-parameters include both magnitude and phase information enabled by the NVNA the computed Δb terms can be combined, along with the X F terms that capture the nonlinear response to the large input at the fundamental, to accurately predict device response to a wide range of input signals. This includes properly accounting for upstream tones and downstream match. The complete equation for scattered wave prediction is as follows: For simplicity, all waves are phase normalized in the above equation. For the full equation, including phase normalization terms, see X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems below. This powerful predictive ability has been combined with interpolation on frequency and input power (as well as any additional independent variables such as DC bias), phase normalization to guarantee time invariance, and Volterra constraints to ensure physically correct extrapolation below measured power levels in the PHD framework for ADS. To properly incorporate DC bias behavior into PHD, the following naming conventions must be followed (p is the port number): Swept or Measured Variable Swept DC Voltage at port p Swept DC Current at port p Naming Convention VDC_p IDC_p 22

23 Measured DC voltage at port p Measured DC current at port p Vp Ip For additional information on simulation with X-parameters, see the documentation accompanying the PHD Design Kit for ADS, available at the EEsof knowledge center: See XnP Components (X1P-X10P) See XnP File Format X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems Definitions: i = output port index j = input port index k = output frequency index l = input frequency index 23

24 References 24

25 The following references are available for additional information on X-parameters and the PHD framework: [1] D. E. Root et al., Broad-Band Poly-Harmonic Distortion (PHD) Behavioral Models From Fast Automated Simulations and Large-Signal Vectorial Network Measurements, IEEE Trans. MTT, vol. 53, no. 11, pp , November 2005 [2] J. Verspecht and D. E. Root, Poly-Harmonic Distortion Modeling, in IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Microwave Magazine, June, [3] J. Verspecht, D. Gunyan, J. Horn, J. Xu, A. Cognata, and D.E. Root, Multi-tone, Multi-Port, and Dynamic Memory Enhancements to PHD Nonlinear Behavioral Models from Large-Signal Measurements and Simulations, 2007 IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Symp. Dig., Honolulu, HI, USA, June 2007 [4] J. Horn et al, X-parameter Measurement and Simulation of a GSM Handset Amplifier, accepted for publication at European Microwave Conference, 2008 Last Modified: 18-Nov-2010 Updated for May-2008 New topic 25

26 Measurement Class The measurement class dialog allows you to choose between four different types of measurements. Only one measurement class can be present at a time. To start the Measurement Class Dialog: Click Response, then Measurement Class Each measurement class shows a corresponding connection diagram and list of measurements. Learn more about: General Measurements Envelope Measurements Multitone Measurements Mixer / Converter Measurements See Also Phase Reference Setup Last Modified: 28-Jul Apr-2008 New dialog New topic 26

27 27

28 General NVNA Use the General Measurement Class to measure X-parameters, S-parameters, and characterize nonlinear components. In this topic: How to make a General NVNA Measurement Measurement Limitations Measurement Configuration Understanding Measurement Results Select Waves / Parameters to Display See Also General Hardware Configuration Phase Reference Setup See Other Measurement Classes How to make a General NVNA Measurement 1. Configure Measurement Hardware. Learn how. 2. Click Response then Measurement Class, then General. Learn about Measurement Class. 3. Complete the Configuration dialog. 4. When all settings are complete, click Apply to send the settings to the PNA. There is a short delay the first time settings are applied after starting or presetting the NVNA software. 5. In the upper-right corner, click Measure: Single to close the Configuration dialog and perform a measurement. 6. To return to the Configuration dialog, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 7. When settings are finalized, click Response, then Cal Wizard to perform a Calibration. 8. After a calibrated measurement has been made, optionally click File, then Save to store the current measurement and calibration settings. Learn more. Note: When using a harmonic number greater than 1 (fundamental frequency) you can NOT perform a phase calibration without first connecting a phase reference. Measurement Limitations Total number of data points = 20,001. To calculate the total measured points: For each sweep segment: Frequency points * Harmonics. Then points for ALL segments are ADDED to calculate the total number of points. 28

29 Frequency * Number of Harmonics is limited to the Stop frequency range of the PNA-X. For example: Stop Freq = 5 GHz * 5 harmonics = 25 GHz. This must be less than 26.5 GHz (N5242A) An error message will indicate whether any calculated frequencies are out of range. Step Size (Frequency range / (number of points 1)) is limited to the spacing resolution of the phase reference. Typically, this would be between 100 khz and 10 MHz depending on the measurement setup and phase source performance. Start / Stop power must be within the ALC range of the PNA. If an Unleveled error message appears, reduce the Start / Stop range, then click Apply. Note that the source attenuators will be fixed for the entire sweep. Measurement Configuration dialog box help Important: General Hardware Configuration to learn how the Hardware Setup and Reference Source settings determine your hardware configuration. Note: For High Power measurements, see App Note Hardware Setup - Choose Standard. This sets an internal source to the DUT input. Reference Source Choose from the following: 10 MHz (PNA-X Internal or External). External Phase Reference Internal Source Measurement Configuration table These settings are made using a segment table as shown. Click bottom buttons to Add and Delete Segments. Frequency ranges can overlap other segments, sweep backwards, or have gaps. When entering stimulus, be sure that all of the frequencies have a common factor for cross-frequency phase correction. If Auto Calculate is selected in the Phase Source Setup dialog, the NVNA will give a warning if no common factor can be found. When a common factor cannot be found, there may be a significant delay. When Response, Couple Segments is selected, all segments are combined into a single sweep, and stimulus is applied in the forward direction only. This is useful for small-signal calibration verification and measurements using one or more external sources. 29

30 Right-click on any setting to show a keypad. Start / Stop Frequency Enter start and stop frequency of the segment. Start is limited to the low-frequency range of the PNA-X. Frequency Points The number of data points to measure between Start and Stop. Note: When 1 data point is selected, then the Stop Frequency/Power will become the Start Frequency/Power when Apply is clicked. Be sure to change BOTH the number of data points and the Stop value, then click Apply when all changes are made. The following Power Sweep settings are not visible when Couple Segments is selected. Start / Stop Power Enter start and stop power levels for the segment. Power Points Enter the number of points to measure between the start and stop power. Power Sweep Linearity Select dbm to use evenly spaced steps in dbm Select Volts to use evenly spaced steps in volts (or sqrt(w)). Volts usually results in fewer steps in the small-signal part of a DUT response and more steps on the largesignal part. When both power and frequency have multiple data points, they are measured as follows:: (For the following example, assume three frequency points (f) and two power points (p).) (f1, p1) (f2, p1) (f3, p1) (f1, p2) (f2, p2) (f3, p2) Maximum Harmonics Enter the number of harmonics to measure for each frequency / power setting. IFBW Set the IF Bandwidth for the segment. A lower bandwidth reduces the amount of trace noise and increases dynamic range, but increases measurement time. Learn more about IFBW. (Link goes to PNA Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) This IFBW setting is ignored for pulsed measurements. Buttons at bottom of dialog Add Segment Adds a segment at the bottom of the table. Insert Segment Inserts a segment above the selected (>) segment. Delete Segment Deletes the selected segment. Delete All Deletes all segments in the table. Avg/Trigger Setup Launches the Averaging / Trigger Setup dialog. Apply All selections are sent to the active channel of the PNA. Understanding Measurement Results In the default measurement setup, a CW stimulus is applied at port 1 of the DUT. While the stimulus is applied, four waves are measured at the stimulus frequency and each of it harmonic frequencies, up to the specified maximum. This is repeated for each frequency 30

31 data point and power level in the measurement setup. The remainder of this topic can help you learn how to choose the parameters to display and how to view them. Measurement Display toolbar help Domain (What to display on the X-Axis) Frequency Shows frequency on the X-axis for the specified fundamental or harmonic at the specified input power level. Time Shows Time on the X-axis for the specified frequency and amplitude as it would be shown on an oscilloscope. Harmonic content is included in the transform. The Time Toolbar appears, which allows you to set the Start, Stop, and Step (resolution) of the X-axis. Parameters (Shown in yellow) Select any of the data parameters to display on the X-axis. Then Harmonic Index becomes another parameter to display on the Data Set selector. 31

32 Sweeps (NOT shown) Available when Measured Variables are selected. Plots ALL data on the X-axis. ET parameters (NOT shown) are available when X- parameters are enabled. Learn how. Format - see separate topic Data Set Selectors (Frequency/Power/ET/Harm Ind) Important: In the above image there are two selectors labeled fund_1 and _Src1Power These two selectors are identical in that they both provide EXACTLY the same selections. Having two selectors may be useful when selecting mixing products for separate ranges. For simplicity, references will be made to only one of the selectors. This selector allows you to select the data set to display. There are as many 'dimensions' to this data set as there are parameters showing. The following example shows FIVE parameters. 1. To select the parameter, click the down-arrow (red circle), then click the parameter. Notes Current parameter / value selection 1. Frequency data point 2. Power data point 3. Extraction tone port 4. Extraction tone frequency 5. Extraction tone phase When one of these parameters are selected for (X-axis) Domain, then Harmonic Index can be selected here. When selected, the value of the specified harmonic index is plotted against the X-axis value of the Domain parameter. Extraction Tone (ET) parameters are available when X- parameters are enabled. Learn how. 2. For each parameter, there are a number of values from which to choose. To select a value, click the down-arrow (Blue circle in below image), then click the value. 32

33 3. Important: Select a value for each of the parameters that are showing for your measurement. Measure Single Data is measured for ALL stimulus conditions and then the channel goes to Hold. All data can be viewed using the individual Frequency and Power settings. Continuous Click to measure ALL stimulus data in real time. Click again or click Single to turn continuous OFF. Fast Single Remeasures the data that is already displayed. Does NOT measure data that is NOT displayed. Fast Continuous Continuously remeasures the data that is already displayed. This may be used to plot the waveform, output power, or DC at a fixed power, frequency, and bias and tune a circuit element to optimize match. When Triggering is enabled from the Stimulus menu, the Single and Continuous buttons will enable the measurement, but the measurement will not actually start until an external trigger is applied. See Also Set the fundamental frequency of A1 wave as the reference - Select Response, then Phase Normalization. In the time domain, this causes the A1 wave to cross the Y axis at zero and all the other waves to be displayed relative to the A1 wave. This will remove any phase drift between measurements. Control the RF Power after a measurement - Select Stimulus, then Source ON/Off after measurement.. This is useful for test programs that set up a single measurement to be triggered multiple times (as in load-pull SW). In this case, the RF power should be kept ON all the time. Progress Bar Indicator During continuous measurements or slow single measurements, a progress bar appears indicating measurement status and estimated time remaining for the measurement. Click Stop to abort the measurement. For very slow measurements, the PNA firmware may become visible along with another dialog that can be used to abort the measurement. 33

34 Select Waves / Parameters to Display To select waves and parameters to measure: Waves 1. Click Response, then Measure. 2. Then choose from Waves - always available. (see below) Device Parameters (see below) S-Parameters - Learn more) Measured Variables (see below) X-Parameters - Learn about X-parameter display An = reference receiver for port n Bn = test port receiver for port n A1 Input stimulus wave at Port 1 (DUT input) B1 Output response wave generated from Port 1 (DUT input) A2 Input stimulus wave at Port 2 reflected from load or generated by PNA-X second source (DUT output) B2 Output response wave generated from Port 2 (DUT output). All Waves All port waves displayed on the same plot. Quad display All four waves displayed in separate plots at the specified frequency and power. Ratios, Currents Launches the Customize Parameters dialog. Device Parameters Input Match (B1/A1) - same as S11 Gain (B2/A1) - same as S21 With X-Parameters enabled, the Device Parameters become: Input Match (XF1,1/ A1,1 ) Gain (XF2,1/ A1,1) Measured Variables Measured variables can be plotted after being configured in the Instrument Control dialog. To plot measured variables, click Response, then Measure, then Measured Variables When more than one variable is configured, then the following dialog is presented: 34

35 When Measured Variables are displayed, Sweeps is available under Domain on the Measurement Display toolbar. Last Modified: 10-Oct Jul Apr-2008 Added Source ON/Off after meas (A.02.02) Overhauled New topic 35

36 Envelope The Envelope Measurement Class allows you to make Pulse Profile measurements of the error-corrected A and B waves. Data is acquired at uniformly-spaced time positions across each harmonic pulse. How to make an Envelope Measurement 1. Configure Measurement Hardware. Learn how. 2. Click Response then Measurement Class, then Envelope. Learn about Measurement Class. 3. Complete the following Configuration dialog. 4. When all settings are complete, click Apply to send the settings to the PNA. There is a short delay the first time settings are applied after starting or presetting the NVNA software. 5. In the upper-right corner, click Measure: Single to close the Configuration dialog and perform a measurement. 6. To return to the Configuration dialog, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 7. When settings are finalized, click Response, then Cal Wizard to perform a Calibration. 8. After a calibrated measurement has been made, click File, then Save to store the current measurement and calibration settings. Learn more. Envelope Configuration dialog box help 36

37 Important: See Envelope Hardware Configuration to learn how the Hardware Setup and Reference Source settings determine your hardware configuration. Hardware Setup - Choose Standard. This sets an internal source to the DUT input. See Also: High Power Pulse Measurements Reference Source Choose from the following: 10 MHz (PNA-X Internal or External). External Phase Reference Internal Source Pulse Configuration PRF and IFBW Enter the DESIRED values. When Calculate is pressed, one or both of these values may change. Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) Frequency of the pulses from the Pulse Generator. Receiver IFBW IF Bandwidth of the PNA. Choose a setting from 1 Hz to 10 KHz. Source Modulation The pulse properties with which to modulate the source. Gates ALL receivers are gated and have identical width and delay values. Width Pulse Width. Delay The delay that occurs before the pulse. All gates are walked across the Source Modulation pulse. Stimulus / Response Source Frequency The fundamental frequency at which to perform the multi-envelope pulse measurement. Source Power The power level of the fundamental frequency. Harmonics The number of harmonics at which to measure a multi-envelope response. Apply All selections are sent to the active channel of the PNA. Calculate All selections are calculated and valid PRF and IFBW values are entered in their fields. If these settings are not acceptable, try changing the values you previously 37

38 entered and click Calculate again. When acceptable values are attained, click Apply to send these values to the PNA. Click Measure: Single or Continuous to start a measurement. Single Data is measured for ALL stimulus conditions and then the channel goes to Hold. All data can be viewed using the individual Frequency and Power settings. Continuous Click to measure ALL stimulus data in real time. Click again to turn continuous OFF. Envelope Measurement window dialog box help Allows you to view the Multi-Envelope pulse profile of each of the harmonics of the fundamental frequency. Data is acquired at uniformly-spaced time positions across the pulse envelope. Envelope Parameters Start, Stop (Time) These two combine to make the window of the assembled pulse profile. To view the entire pulse, the start and stop values must be at least as wide as the Source Modulation Width plus Delay value. Widen the start / Stop times to increase the number of points that are measured in the pulse profile. 38

39 Step (Size) Set this equal to the gate width on the Pulse Multi-Envelope Configuration / Calibration tab. Format The display format for all data traces. Choose from Log Mag, Lin Mag, Phase, Real, Imaginary, and Polar. When Phase is selected, all measurements are unratioed, including phase. Select Phase Normalization to cause the A1 wave to cross the Y axis at zero, and all the other waves to be displayed relative to the A1 wave. To add or change the displayed measurements: Click Response, then Measure Harmonics View all of the harmonics of a specific wave. Waves View all of the waves of a specific harmonic. An = incident wave for port n Bn = transmitted / reflected wave port n A1 Incident wave at Port 1 (DUT input) (R1 receiver) B2 Same wave transmitted to Port 2 (DUT output). The DUT is showing signs of compression. A2 Incident wave for Port 2 (DUT output). This is actually the B2 wave transmitted through port two, and reflecting off the source termination, and then measured by the port 2 reference receiver. B1 Same wave transmitted to Port 1 (DUT input). Quad display All four receivers, as shown in the above image. Customize Launches the Customize Parameters dialog. Measured Variables Measured variables can be plotted after being configured in the Instrument Control dialog. To plot measured variables, click Response, then Measure, then Measured Variables When more than one variable is configured, then the following dialog is presented: 39

40 When Measured Variables are displayed, Sweeps is available under Domain on the Measurement Display toolbar. Last Modified: 28-Jul Feb Apr-2008 Updated for Measurement Class Updated Pulse image New topic 40

41 Mixer / Converter Note: PNA Option 087 (N524xA) S93087A (N524xB) (FCA Mixer/Converter measurements) is required for this measurement class. Using Mixer/Converter measurements you can view the mixing products of not only the Input and LO frequencies, but also the mixing products of the harmonics of those frequencies. In this topic: Mixer/Converter Measurement Configuration dialog box Understanding Mixer Measurement Results Select Waves / Parameters to Display See Also Mixer Hardware Configuration Procedure: Setup Mixer Measurement See Other Measurement Classes Mixer/Converter Measurement Configuration dialog box help Important: See Mixer Hardware Configuration to learn how the Hardware Setup and Reference Source settings determine your hardware configuration. Hardware Setup Choose from the following: 41

42 Internal sources (Both Input and LO) (X-parameters are NOT available) External LO source (Internal Input) External Input (and Internal LO) When an External Source is specified, click Configure Source on the diagram next to Input or LO. Learn how to configure External Sources. Reference Source Choose from the following: 10 MHz (PNA-X Internal or External). External Phase Reference Internal Source Stimulus Settings to the Mixer/Converter You can sweep either the Input or the LO, or have both the Input and LO as fixed CW frequencies. Right-click on any numeric setting to show a keypad. Choose from: Start / Stop Enter start and stop frequency of the Input OR LO. Both are limited to the frequency range of the PNA-X. Center / Span Enter center and frequency span of the Input OR LO. Fixed Enter the single (CW) frequency of the Input OR LO (the other range must be swept). Offset Enter the frequency offset from the Input or LO frequencies (the other range must be swept). Use this setting to make Fixed IF measurements. See the following procedure. Enter a POSITIVE offset value to set the frequency ABOVE the Input or LO. Enter a NEGATIVE offset value to set the frequency BELOW the Input or LO. How to Configure a Fixed IF (Output) Measurement Fixed IF measurements step the Input and LO frequencies together. To do this: 1. Set the Input to the desired Start/Stop stimulus frequencies. 2. Set the LO to Offset and enter the frequency that the LO should step ABOVE or BELOW the input frequency. To step the LO ABOVE the input frequency, enter as POSITIVE offset value. To step the LO BELOW the input frequency enter as NEGATIVE offset value. Measurement Frequencies The following settings specify the frequencies at which measurements will be made. In NVNA, Input is really (Input * harmonic #) and LO is really (LO * harmonic #). NVNA measures the mixing products at all the harmonic numbers that are specified in the Harmonics group. Limit Bandwidth 42

43 Start/Stop Specify the frequency range to limit the search of harmonics. If your converter has an output filter, products that fall outside of the filter pass band likely need not be measured. Harmonics Specify the number of Input and LO harmonics to measure and use for each frequency / power setting / mixing product. ) Specify the mixing products to measure. Mixing Products (m*input +/- n*lo Max m and Max n - Measure all mixing products. In the EXAMPLE table below, these are highlighted in yellow and orange. Max Order (m+n) Measure only the mixing products where m+n total the specified number. High Side / Low Side Both (+/- LO) Measure mixing products resulting from Input +/- LO High Side (+LO) Measure mixing products resulting from Input + LO Low Side (-LO) Measure mixing products resulting from Input - LO Example The example table below shows the mixing products that will be displayed with the following settings: Note Input Frequency: 1.2 GHz (Start and Stop) LO Frequency:.4 GHz (Start and Stop) Harmonics: Max Input and Max LO = 5 Mixing products: m = 3; n = 4; also shown: Max order (m+n) = 3 The top chart shows the mixing products of Input + LO. The bottom chart shows the mixing products of Input - LO. The High Side/Low Side selection determines whether to measure mixing products from both charts or just one. The rows represent m*input The columns represent n*lo 43

44 In list format when m=3 and n=4 is selected:.4,.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, 4.0, 4.4, 4.8, 5.2, 5.6, 6.0 Legend This example table shows two methods to select the mixing products to measure. Fundamentals Always measured. Harmonics Measured when Max Input and Max LO = 5 Mixing Products Mixing Products Mixing Products Mixing Products Measured when Max Order (m+n)=3 is selected. Measured when Max m=3 and is selected. Max n=4 Note: The orange products are also measured. NOT measured with either Mixing Product selection. NOT measured - Out of NVNA range Other Sweep Settings Source Power Start / Stop Power Enter start and stop power levels for the Input and LO. Power Points Enter the number of points to measure between the start and stop power. Note: LO Power is corrected at the cal reference plane using a Source Power Cal. 44

45 Number of Freq. Points The number of data points to measure between Start and Stop. If 1 is selected, then ONLY the Start value is applied. When both power and frequency have multiple data points, they are measured as follows:: (For the following example, assume three frequency points (f) and two power points (p).) (f1, p1) (f2, p1) (f3, p1) (f1, p2) (f2, p2) (f3, p2) IFBW Set the IF Bandwidth for the receiver. A lower bandwidth reduces the amount of trace noise and increases dynamic range, but increases measurement time. Learn more about IFBW. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Switch to Multitone Launches the Multitone Configuration dialog. Your Mixer configuration settings are transferred to that dialog. Apply All selections are sent to the active channel of the PNA. Close Exit the Configuration dialog. Press Measure: Single to start a measurement. Understanding Mixer Measurement Results In the default measurement setup, a CW stimulus is applied at port 1 of the DUT. While the stimulus is applied, four waves are measured from the fundamental frequency up to the maximum harmonic frequency. This is repeated for each fundamental frequency and power in the measurement setup. Measurement Display toolbar help For a better understanding of the tones that are displayed, see Measurement Settings Example. 45

46 Domain (What to display on the X-Axis) Frequency Shows frequency on the X-axis for the specified fundamental or harmonic at the specified input power level. Time Shows Time on the X-axis for the specified frequency and amplitude as it would be shown on an oscilloscope. Harmonic content is included in the transform. The Time Toolbar appears, which allows you to set the Start, Stop, and Step (resolution) of the X-axis. Parameters (Shown in yellow) Select any of the data parameters to display on the X-axis. Then Harmonic Index becomes another parameter to display on the Data Set selector. Sweeps (NOT shown) are available when Measured Variables are selected. Plots ALL data on the X-axis. ET parameters (NOT shown) are available when X- parameters are enabled. Learn more. Format - see separate topic Data Selectors (Frequency/Power/ET/Harm Ind) Important: In the above image there are two selectors labeled _fund_1 and _fund_2 These two selectors are identical in that they both provide EXACTLY the same selections. Having two selectors may be useful when selecting mixing products for separate ranges. For simplicity, references will be made ONLY one of the selectors. Your configuration could have resulted in many measurements at various frequencies, power levels, extraction tones, and so forth. This selector allows you to select the data to display. There are as many 'dimensions' to this data set as there are parameters showing. The following example shows FOUR parameters. 1. To select the parameter, click the down-arrow (red circle), then click the parameter. Notes Current parameter / value selection 1. _fund_1 (Input Freq) 2. _fund_2 (LO Freq) 3. Source 1 Power 4. Source 2 Power (LO power) 46

47 When one of these parameters are selected for (X-axis) Domain, then Harmonic Index can be selected here. When selected, the value of the specified harmonic index is plotted against the X-axis value of the Domain parameter. Extraction Tone (ET) parameters are available when X- parameters are enabled. Learn how. 2. For each parameter, there are a number of values from which to choose. To select a value, click the down-arrow (Blue circle in below image), then click the value. 3. Important: Select a value for each of the parameters that are showing for your measurement. Measure Single Data is measured for ALL stimulus conditions and then the channel goes to Hold. All data can be viewed using the individual Frequency and Power settings. Continuous Click to measure ALL stimulus data in real time. Click again or click Single to turn continuous OFF. Fast Single Remeasures the data that is already displayed. Does NOT measure data that is NOT displayed. Fast Continuous Continuously remeasures the data that is already displayed. This may be used to plot the waveform, output power, or DC at a fixed power, frequency, and bias and tune a circuit element to optimize match. When Triggering is enabled from the Stimulus menu, the Single and Continuous buttons will enable the measurement, but the measurement will not actually start until an external trigger is applied. See Also Select Response, then Phase Normalization to set the fundamental frequency of A1 wave as the reference. In the time domain, this causes the A1 wave to cross the Y axis at zero and all the other waves to be displayed relative to the A1 wave. This will remove any phase drift between measurements. Progress Bar Indicator During continuous measurements or slow single measurements, a progress bar will popup indicating measurement status and estimated time remaining for the measurement. Click Stop to abort the measurement. 47

48 For very slow measurements, the PNA-X firmware may become visible along with another dialog that can be used to abort the measurement. Select Waves / Parameters to Display To select waves and parameters to measure: 1. Click Response, then Measure. 2. Then choose from Waves - always available. (see below) (see below) Device Parameters Waves: S-Parameters - Learn more ) (see below) Measured Variables X-Parameters - Learn about X-parameter display An = reference receiver for port n Bn = test port receiver for port n A1 Input stimulus wave at Port 1 (DUT input) B1 Output response wave generated from Port 1 (DUT input) A2 Input stimulus wave at Port 2 reflected from load or generated by PNA-X second source (DUT output) B2 Output response wave generated from Port 2 (DUT output). All Waves All port waves displayed on the same plot. Quad display All four waves displayed in separate plots at the specified frequency and power. Ratios, Currents Launches the Customize Parameters dialog. Device Parameters Single receivers are measured in dbm. Ratioed receivers are measured in db. Parameter Description Wave Qty/Ratio X-params Mixing Product Note: and/or depends on the 48

49 High/Low Side setting Input Match Reflection at DUT Input B1/A1 XFp/ A1 [1,0] p is [1,(1,0)] Conversion Gain Ratio of the power at the output frequency to the power at the input frequency. B2/A1 XFp/ A1 B2 is [1,-1] and/or [1,1] A1 is [1,0] p is [2,(1,-1)] and/or [2,(1,1)] IPwr DUT Input power A1 [1,0] OPwr DUT Output power B2 XFp [1,-1] and/or [1,1] p is [2,(1,-1)] and/or [2,(1,1)] LOPwr DUT LO power A3 [0,1] Leak_O_L LO leakage at DUT output B2 XFp [0,1] p is [2,(0,1)] Leak_O_I Input leakage at DUT output B2 XFp [1,0] p is [2,(1,0)] Leak_I_L LO leakage at DUT input B1 XFp [0,1] p is [1,(0,1)] LOMatch Reflection at DUT LO B3/A3 XSpp [0,1] p is [3,(0,1)] Iso_I_L LO to Input Isolation B1/A3 XFp/A3 [0,1] p is [1,(0,1)] Iso_O_L LO to Output Isolation B2/A3 XFp/A3 [0,1] p is [2,(0,1)] Iso_O_I Input to Output Isolation B2/A1 XFp/A1 [1,0] p is [2,(1,0)] Iso_I_O OutputMatch Output to Input Isolation (available ONLY when X-parameters are measured) Reflection at DUT Output (only available when X- parameters are measured) XSpq p,q is [1,(1,-1)], [2,(1,-1)] and/or [1,(1,1)], [2,(1,1)] XSpp p is [2,(1,-1)] and/or [2,(1,1)] 49

50 Measured Variables Measured variables can be plotted after being configured in the Instrument Control dialog. To plot measured variables, click Response, then Measure, then Measured Variables When more than one variable is configured, then the following dialog is presented: When Measured Variables are displayed, Sweeps is available under Domain on the Measurement Display toolbar. Last Modified: 24-Oct Feb May Jul-2010 Fixed offset freq definition Added PNA option required Added Fixed IF New topic 50

51 Setup Mixer Measurement The following procedure shows how to configure a Mixer measurement with the following properties: External Input Source Swept Input, Swept LO, and Fixed Output frequencies. Note: An external source is NOT necessary. However, because the PNA-X only has two sources, X-parameter measurements are NOT allowed. Configure Basic Mixer Measurement Description Select Mixer class Action Click Response, then Measurement Class, then Mixer Click OK on the "Configure Number of Ports" dialog to configure NVNA in 3-port mode (required for Mixer measurements). Preset Make Configuration Settings Select Hardware setup Click Utility, then Preset Click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 1. Under Hardware Setup, select External Input Source. 2. Under Reference (Phase) Source, select 10 MHz. If necessary, select Source Setup (at the bottom of the Reference Source selector) to access the Phase Source Setup dialog with more advanced options such as phase reference divide ratio, PRF selection. 3. Click View Setup, then configure your system as documented. Configure Frequencies 1. Configure the Input and LO frequencies. In this example, the Input is swept from 1 GHz to 2 GHz, and the LO is Offset from the Input by 50 MHz resulting in a fixed Output frequency. 51

52 Configure Source 1. If an external source is used, click Configure Source next to the Input or LO port. 2. On the Source Configuration dialog, change the Address and any non-standard commands. The source can also be configured to turn ON or OFF (default) after the measurement is complete. Configure Measurement Frequencies 1. Enter a Limit Bandwidth start and stop value. Any mixing products falling outside of the specified frequency range will not be measured. 2. Specify the number of Input and LO harmonics to be measured. 3. Choose order of mixing products to be measured. Maximum mixing products of Input and LO can be selected separately, or a combined maximum mixing order can be specified. 4. Select which mixing products should be measured: High Side Only, Low Side Only, or Both. Learn more about these settings. Configure Other Sweep Settings 1. Enter Input Source Power and LO Source Power start and stop values. 2. Choose the number of Power Points to sweep. 3. Choose the Number of Freq. Points to sweep. This applies to Input or LO frequency sweep set up above. 4. Select the measurement IF Bandwidth. 5. Click Apply 6. Click Single 52

53 Evaluate Measurement Results Save the configuration to an *.ncm file. 1. Interpret the displayed results. Learn how. 2. If changes to the setup are required, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration to return to the Mixer Configuration dialog. 3. When acceptable results are displayed, click Response, then Calibration Wizard to perform a calibration. Learn how. 1. Click File, then Save 2. Enter a name for the mixer configuration, then press Save. Note: The current setup can be saved at any time during measurement setup. Save early and often! Last Modified: 28-Jan-2011 New topic 53

54 Multitone 54

55 Multitone Measurements Note: PNA Option 087 (N524xA) S93087A (N524xB) (Swept IMD measurements) is required for this measurement class. The NVNA Multitone measurement capability is extremely flexible, allowing you to generate tones from internal or external sources, and measure responses in the form of harmonics and mixing products from each tone. The Multitone measurement class also allows you to setup mixer measurements. You would do this to use Swept Variables or other features that are NOT available in the Mixer/Converter measurement class. To learn how to make a simple mixer configuration in the Multitone class, first configure the mixer in the Mixer measurement class. Then click Switch to Multitone Setup at the bottom of the Mixer Measurement Configuration dialog. You can then see how the resulting Multitone measurement class configures the same measurement. X-parameters always require an internal source for the extraction tone. Therefore, only one tone can be generated from the other internal source. An external source is required for additional tones. In this topic How to make a Multitone Measurement Multitone Measurement Configuration dialog box help Measurement setup dialog box help See Also Multitone Hardware Configuration Multitone Source Frequency Setup Dialog Understanding the Multitone Measurement Display Coupling a Fundamental Frequency to a Swept Variable Notation and Equations for Multiport / Multitone X-parameters (pdf document) See Procedures Setup Multitone Measurement using External Multitone Source Setup Multitone Measurment using Internal Sources See Other Measurement Classes How to make a Multitone Measurement 1. Configure Measurement Hardware. Learn how. 2. Click Response then Measurement Class, then Multitone. Learn about Measurement Class. 55

56 3. Complete the Multitone dialogs on this and other pages: a. Measurement Configuration b. Measurement Setup c. Multitone Source Frequency Setup d. See Multitone Procedures for more information. 4. When all settings are complete, click Apply to send the settings to the PNA. There is a short delay the first time settings are applied after starting or presetting the NVNA software. 5. In the upper-right corner, click Measure: Single to close the Configuration dialog and perform a measurement. 6. Setup the measurement display. Learn how. 7. To return to the Configuration dialog, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 8. When settings are finalized, click Response, then Cal Wizard to perform a Calibration. 9. After a calibrated measurement has been made, click File, then Save to store the current measurement and calibration settings. Learn more. Multitone Measurement Configuration dialog box help Important! This dialog contains FIVE distinct areas as indicated by shaded colors in the image below. On the dialog, click in an area to select and make changes to that area. Many fields in each area are BUTTONS (formatted like this paragraph) that launch other configuration dialogs. 56

57 Click in the image, or scroll down, to learn more about each area. 1. Hardware Setup - These two settings determine your hardware configuration. 2. Source Setup - Configures the required sources (Internal, or External) to generate tones. 3. Swept Variable Setup - Instead of fixed frequencies and power levels, variables can be used to quickly change values from a single setting. See Variable Configuration Dialog. 4. Receiver Setup - Sets the frequencies to be measured. 5. Bottom buttons - Functionality changes depending on the selected area above. Important: See Multitone Hardware Configurations to learn how the Hardware Setup and Reference Source settings determine your hardware configuration. Hardware Setup Choose from: Internal Sources External Multitone Src Customize - Automatically appears when you have made selections that renders one of the standard Multitone Hardware Configurations invalid. You are then responsible for making switch settings in the See PNA-X Path Configurator to route signals to the correct ports. Reference Source Choose from: 57

58 Internal - NOT allowed when Hardware Setup is set to Internal. 10 MHz External Source View Setup Click to see a diagram of the currently-selected href="multitone_hardware_configuration.htm">hardware/reference setup. Receiver Setup This section specifies the frequencies to be measured by the relevant receivers. Measurements can occur only within the frequency span of the PNA. To Add Fundamentals, click anywhere in the Receiver Setup area, then click Add or Insert Row. To configure the fundamental frequencies, click the Fundamental Frequency Setup button for the associated 'fund_n' range. This starts the Measurement Setup dialog. When using an External Multitone Source, first configure the source, then generate the receiver frequencies automatically. Learn how. The following settings specify the frequencies to which the receivers will be tuned to make measurements. NVNA measures the fundamental frequencies and harmonics, and the mixing products of the fundamentals and harmonics. The number of mixing products that are measured is limited by the following: Maximum Order The number of harmonics to measure for each fundamental. If the Max Mixing Order allows, this is also the maximum mixing product to measure for that fundamental range. Maximum Mixing Order The sum of mixing products of all fundamentals. Limit Measurement Bandwidth Setting Receiver Settings Example Center Freq (center of two tones) = 1 GHz Freq Spacing (spacing between two tones) = 20 MHz Max Order: These harmonics are always measured. fund_1 = 5 fund_2 = 4 Max Mixing Order = 4: Only measure products where (fund_1 + fund_2) < = 4 58

59 Legend Fundamentals measured. Max Order (harmonics) measured. Mixing products measured. Up to (fund_1 + fund_2) = 4 NOT measured - All other mixing products because they exceed Max Order AND Max Mixing Order. IFBW Set the IF Bandwidth for the segment. A lower bandwidth reduces the amount of trace noise and increases dynamic range, but increases measurement time. Learn more about IFBW. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) The mixing products are measured using the lower IFBW of the two fundamentals. This IFBW setting is ignored for pulsed measurements. Source Setup Status - Turns On/Off the specified source (shown in Source Configuration field). Port PNA-X Source port. Source Frequency - Click to launch the Source Frequency tab of the Measurement Setup dialog. 59

60 Source Power Setup - Click to launch the Source Power tab of the Measurement Setup dialog. Source Configuration - Click to launch the Source Configuration tab of the Measurement Setup dialog. Swept Variable Setup Instead of fixed frequencies and power levels, variables can be used to quickly change values from a single setting. See Variable Configuration. (Used ONLY with External Sources). Buttons at bottom of dialog These buttons change function depending on the selected area Add Row/Segment Adds a row/segment at the bottom of the table. Delete Row/Segment Deletes the selected row/segment. Delete All Deletes all rows/segments in the table. Measurement setup dialog box help To access this dialog, click any of the buttons in the Measurement Configuration Dialog. Click a tab or scroll down to learn more about each of these tabs. Fundamental Frequency Setup tab The fundamental tones are the main tones that are used to stimulate your DUT. For each fundamental tone, configure one or more frequency ranges and data points. Fundamental Frequency - Select a 'fund_n' name for the frequency range to be configured. Click Add or Delete Fundamental buttons to add or delete names that appear. 60

61 These frequency settings are made using a segment table as shown. Click Add and Delete Segments to add or delete segments that appear. Frequency ranges can overlap other segments, sweep backwards, or have gaps. When entering stimulus, be sure that all of the frequencies have a common factor for cross-frequency phase correction. If Auto Calculate is selected in the Phase Source Setup dialog, the NVNA will give a warning if no common factor can be found. When a common factor cannot be found, there may be a significant delay. Right-click on any setting to show a keypad. Sweep Type Choose from: Linear Frequency The stimulus frequencies are spaced linearly from start to stop. Log Frequency The stimulus frequencies are spaced logarithmically from start to stop. Coupled Select, then click the adjacent Coupled Configuration button to start the Coupled Sweep dialog. Learn more about Coupled Sweep. Start / Stop Frequency Enter start and stop frequency of the segment. Frequencies are limited by the frequency range of the PNA-X. To create a single CW frequency, set Start and Stop to the same frequency. Frequency Points The number of stimulus / data points to measure between Start and Stop. If 1 is selected, then ONLY the Start value is applied. Coupled Configuration Shows the current status of coupling for the adjacent segment. Select Sweep Type: Coupled, then click the adjacent Coupled Configuration button to start the Coupled Sweep dialog. Learn more about Coupled Sweep. Source Frequency Setup tab This tab associates each fundamental tone with a physical source. 61

62 The segment list table is identical to the Fundamental Frequency tab. They can also be modified here. Source: Select a source for the fund_n fundamental tone. Click Add or Delete Source to change the names that appear. A source can be added, then click the Source Configuration tab to configure the source. Source Frequency: Select a frequency range to associate with the source. Choose from: A preconfigured 'fund_n' range Mixing product - Allows a source to be placed at a harmonic or a mixing product of available fundamental frequencies. Examples: To place the Source Frequency at 3*fund_1 With only fund_1 showing, enter Mixing Index = 3, then click OK. To place the Source Frequency at 3*fund_2+2*fund_1 (see following image): 1. Under Receiver Setup, create fund_1 and fund2. 2. On this dialog, click Add Fundamental to show fund_1 and fund_2. 3. Enter Mixing Index values as shown below. (To subtract fundamentals, enter a negative value.) Multitone Source - When selected, the Source Frequency tab is replaced with the Multitone Source Setup dialog. This dialog is used to configure a vector signal generators (MXG, ESG, some PSGs) which may include a multitone option that enables generation of 2 or more tones. See a procedure for Setup Multitone Measurement using External Multitone Source Sweep Type - Choose from Linear Frequency - The fundamental is stepped linearly from Start to Stop in the specified number of points. Log Frequency - The fundamental is stepped logarithmically from Start to Stop in the specified number of points. Coupled - The fundamental is specified by an algorithm that is specified in the coupled configuration dialog. Learn more. See a procedure for Setup Multitone Measurment using Internal Sources. 62

63 Buttons at bottom of dialog These buttons change function depending on the selected area Add Segment Adds a segment at the bottom of the table. Delete Segment Deletes the selected segment. Delete All Deletes all segments in the table. Source Power Setup Tab The following Power Sweep settings are not visible when Couple Segments is selected. Start / Stop Power Enter start and stop power levels for the segment. Power Points Enter the number of points to measure between the start and stop power. Sweep Type Linear Select Linear dbm to use evenly spaced steps in dbm. Select Linear Voltage to use evenly spaced steps in volts (or sqrt(w)). Volts usually results in fewer steps in the small-signal part of a DUT response and more steps on the large-signal part. For the following examples, assume three frequency points (f) and three power points (p). Single sweep for all frequencies Frequency is swept at each stepped power level as follows: (f1, p1) (f2, p1) (f3, p1) (f1, p2) (f2, p2) (f3, p2) (f1, p3) (f2, p3) (f3, p3) Separate sweeps for each segment Power is swept at each stepped frequency as follows: (f1, p1) (f1, p2) (f1, p3) (f2, p1) (f2, p2) (f2, p3) (f3, p1) (f3, p2) (f3, p3) Source Configuration Tab 63

64 Source Select the Source to be configured. Source Frequency Select the name of the variable that is to be associated with the selected Source. Internal Source The specified Source_N is a PNA-X internal source. External Source Click to launch the External Source Configuration dialog where you establish a connection between the PNA-X and the source. Last Modified: 11-Feb May Jul-2010 Added PNA option required Added mixer meas New topic 64

65 Multitone Source Frequency Setup Dialog This dialog is used to setup an External multitone source or setup swept variables for PNA-X Internal sources. Note: First setup the source Multitone frequencies in this dialog, then automatically generate the receiver frequencies. Learn more. To access this dialog: In the Multitone Measurement Configuration dialog, Source Frequency Setup tab, select Source Frequency: Multitone Source Center Frequency Choose from: Fixed value (frequency) Enter a value in Hz ( ) or in Scientific notation (1e7). Variable Select the Variable from the adjacent Variable Selection/Configuration field. Learn how to configure a Variable. Frequency Spacing Each tone is offset from the adjacent tones by this value. Choose from: Fixed value (frequency) Enter a value in Hz ( ) or in Scientific notation (1e7). Variable. Select the Variable from the adjacent Variable Selection/Configuration field. Learn how to configure a Variable. 65

66 Number of Tones Select the number of tones to be generated by the external source. The tone power and phase settings are configured individually for each tone. If an ODD number of tones is specified, then center frequency is included in the list of tones.. If a EVEN number is specified, the center frequency is NOT included. Generate Fundamental Frequencies from Multitone Sources When clicked, the Receiver frequencies are automatically generated from the source frequencies. The following message warns that the Fundamental (Receiver) settings will be Deleted (Yes) or Added to (No) the new fundamental settings. View/Edit Sweep Accesses the Variable Configuration dialog for the selection in the Variable Selection/Configuration list to allow editing. Add Variable Accesses the Variable Configuration dialog to setup a new variable. Tone Frequency Generated automatically from the Center Frequency and Number of Tones settings. This value can NOT be edited in the table. Tone Power Setup, Tone Power (if Sweep power per tone is selected), and Tone Power Offset (if Sweep total powers is selected) Each tone can have an independent power level. Choose from: Fixed value Select, then enter a Tone Power or Tone Power Offset in dbm. Variable Select, then click in Tone Power or Tone Power Offset, then select a Variable from the adjacent Variable Selection/Configuration field. Learn how to configure a Variable. Note: When performing Multitone measurements with an external Multitone source, the tone power is corrected in NVNA. Some sources provide averaged tone power when used without NVNA. Tone Phase Setup and Tone Phase Each tone can have an independent power level. Choose from: Fixed value Select, then enter a Tone Phase in degrees. Variable Select, then click in Tone Phase, then select a Variable from the adjacent Variable Selection/Configuration field. Learn how to configure a Variable. Tone State Click to turn a Tone ON and OFF. Sweep total powers Total power of all generated tones. For example, if the multitone source power is set to 0 dbm, the tone powers are adjusted such that the sum of all generated tones equals 0 dbm. An offset can be set up and maintained between the tones in the Tone Power Offset field. Sweep power per tone Sets the absolute power of each tone. 66

67 Last Modified: 11-May Feb Nov Sep-2010 Added new dialog showing Sweep total powers and Sweep power per tone Added PNA option required Added power level note New topic 67

68 Multitone Hardware Configuration Note: PNA Option 087 (N524xA) S93087A (N524xB) (Swept IMD measurements) is required for this measurement class. Multitone measurements can be configured in many ways. Your choice depends on whether you plan to perform X-parameter extraction, whether you have an external source available, and the measurement frequencies of interest. For X-parameter measurements, the phase reference must be driven by an external source or the PNA-X 10 MHz reference generator. Learn how to perform X-parameter extraction. The following connections are made for ALL configurations: 1. Connect power meter, external source (optional), to the PNA-X GPIB Controller connector. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) A USB power meter may also be used. See also Configure GPIB Instruments 2. Connect both the Calibration and Measurement Phase References to the PNA-X USB. Learn more about the Phase Reference Setup. See Also PNA-X Block Diagrams Configuration Diagrams You 'tell' the NVNA your configuration choice at the Measurement Configuration dialog by selecting the Hardware Setup and Reference Source. Customize automatically appears when you have made Hardware configuration selections that renders one of the standard Multitone Hardware Configurations invalid. You are then responsible for making switch settings in the See PNA-X Path Configurator to route signals to the correct ports. When Hardware Setup is set to Customize X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Pulse measurements must be made with the receiver path set to Wide. Only CW measurements should use the narrow receiver path. To set the receiver path, click Response, then Receiver Path. Config# Click to view diagram Inpu t Sou rce Pha se Ref. Sou rce X- Para ms PNA Switch Settings* href="javascript:void(0);" id="a1" style="font-weight: normal;" onmouseover="= 4 && typeof(bspspopuponmouseover) == 'function') BSPSPopupOnMouseOver(event);" class="bsscpopup" 68

69 onclick="bsscpopup('source_out1_low_ba nd_mode.htm');return false;">see PNA-X Path Configurator href="#conf ig1">1 Ext Multi Src (CW Only ) or Ext Multi Src (CW or Puls e) 2 Ext Multi Src (CW Only ) or Ext Multi Src (CW or Puls e) 3 Int (CW Only ) or Int (CW or Puls e) 4 Ext Multi Src (CW Only ) or Ext Multi Src (CW or Inter nal Yes Port1 Bypass = Combiner Ext Yes Port1 Bypass = Combiner Ext No No Change to Default 10 MHz Yes Port1 Bypass = Combiner 69

70 Puls e) 5 Int (CW Only ) or Int (CW or Puls e) 10 MHz No No Change to Default Configuration 1 Hardware Setup = External Multitone Src (CW only) or (CW or Pulse) Reference = Internal Source X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN 70

71 2 External source RF OUT 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 DUT OUT (Port 2) 5 Measurement Phase Reference OUT 6 PNA-X Test Port 3 PNA-X Rear Panel Combiner Arm J10 DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 4 RCVR C IN (Port 3) Splitter IN Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Supplied by customer 7 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 8 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN Configuration 2 Hardware Setup = External Multitone Src (CW only) or (CW or Pulse) Reference = External Source 71

72 X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source #1 10 MHz OUT 2 External source #1 10 MHz OUT 3 External source RF OUT 4 PNA-X Test Port 1 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) 6 External source #2 RF OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN External source #2 10 MHz IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 1 COMB Arm J10 DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN TEE 10 MHz output TEE 10 MHz output Remove jumper loop Supplied by customer 72

73 7 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 8 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 9 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 3 Hardware Setup = Internal Source (CW only) or (CW or Pulse) Reference = External Source X-Parameters are NOT available Note: When Hardware Setup is set to Customize, then X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Callout Sequence From To Notes 73

74 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) 4 External source RF OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN Supplied by customer 5 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 6 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 7 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 4 Hardware Setup = External Multitone Src (CW only) or (CW or Pulse) Reference = 10 MHz 74

75 X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT 3 External source RF OUT 4 PNA-X Test Port 1 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN Splitter IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 1 COMB Arm J10 DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 Supplied by customer 75

76 6 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 7 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 8 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 5 Hardware Setup = Internal Source ("CW Only" and "CW or Pulse") Reference = 10 MHz X-Parameters NOT available Note: When Hardware Setup is set to Customize, then X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT Splitter IN 76

77 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 4 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 5 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 6 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Last Modified: 15-Oct Apr Feb Aug-2010 Fixed images Replaced backward images Added PNA option required New topic 77

78 Coupling a Fundamental Frequency to a Swept Variable For Multitone measurements, it is very useful to construct variables to represent frequency ranges such as centerfreq and offsetfreq. This makes it very easy to change the frequency range for both the source and receivers in one dialog. This process can be followed for both PNA-X Internal and External sources. However, when using an External Multitone source, a different process is used. Learn how. Coupled Sweep Configuration dialog box help Important: See a procedure that shows how to use this dialog to Setup a Multitone Measurement using Internal Sources. To couple a sweep to a variable, you must have already configured a sweep variable and it appears in the Variable Selection/Configuration field. In the image below, two variables are already configured: centerfreq and offsetfreq. If you have NOT already done this, click View/Edit Sweep to start the Variable Configuration dialog. Coupled Sweep for fund_n Shows the fundamental name for which the coupled sweep will be configured. Coupled to: Choose to couple the sweep to one of the following: Variable: Select a Variable name listed in the adjacent text box. Fixed Value Enter a value to couple to for each data point. Multiplier Choose to couple the sweep to one of the following: Variable: Select a Variable name that is listed in the adjacent text box. Fixed Value Enter a value to multiply by for each data point. Offset Choose to couple the sweep to one of the following: Variable: Select a Variable name that is listed in the adjacent text box. Fixed Value Enter a value to offset by for each data point. Offset Multiplier Choose to couple the sweep to one of the following: 78

79 Variable: Select a Variable name that is listed in the adjacent text box. Fixed Value Enter a value to multiply and offset by for each data point. Last Modified: 18-Nov-2010 New topic 79

80 Understanding the Multitone Measurement Display While potentially several swept stimulus tones are applied to the input of the DUT, four waves are measured for each fundamental frequency up to the maximum harmonic frequency. In addition, mixing products are measured from each tone. Optionally, the tone spacing may be swept, source power can be incremented, and X-parameter extraction tones can be changed. With all of these parameters changing, choosing what to view on the measurement display, then learning how to make the correct settings, can be challenging. This topic will help you learn how to make the correct settings, and how to interpret what you see. Measurement Display toolbar help TIP: To zoom on a set of tones, drag your mouse cursor to form a box around the tones of interest. For a better understanding of the tone frequencies that are displayed, see Receiver Settings Example. See Also: Select Waves and Parameters to Display Domain (What to display on the X-Axis) 80

81 Frequency Shows frequency on the X-axis for the specified fundamental or harmonic at the specified input power level. Time Shows Time on the X-axis for the specified frequency and amplitude as it would be shown on an oscilloscope. Harmonic content is included in the transform. The Time Toolbar appears, which allows you to set the Start, Stop, and Step (resolution) of the X-axis. Parameters (Shown in yellow) Select any of the data parameters to display on the X-axis. Then Harmonic Index becomes another parameter to display on the Data Set selector. For example, with _fund_1 and harmonic Index 2 selected, when fund_1 is 1 GHz, the measurement at 2 GHz is plotted. When fund_1 is 2 GHz, the measurement at 4 GHz is plotted. NOT Shown Sweeps Available when Measured Variables are selected. Plots ALL data on the X-axis. ET parameters Available when X-parameters are enabled. Learn how. Format - see separate topic Data Selectors (Frequency/Power/ET/Harm Ind) Important: In the above image there are two selectors labeled centerfreq and offsetfreq These two selectors are identical in that they both provide EXACTLY the same selections. Having two selectors may be useful when selecting mixing products for separate ranges. For simplicity, references will be made ONLY one of the selectors. Your configuration could have resulted in many measurements at various frequencies, power levels, extraction tones, and so forth. This selector allows you to select the data to display. There are as many 'dimensions' to this data set as there are parameters showing. The following example shows FOUR parameters. 1. To select the parameter, click the down-arrow (red circle), then click the parameter. Current parameter / value selection 1. Center Frequency data point 2. Offset Frequency data point 81

82 Notes 3. Source 1 Power 4. Source 1 Power When one of these parameters are selected for (X-axis) Domain, then Harmonic Index can be selected. When selected, the value of the specified harmonic index is plotted against the X-axis value of the Domain parameter. Extraction Tone (ET) parameters are available when X- parameters are enabled. Learn how. 2. For each parameter, there are a number of values from which to choose. To select a value, click the down-arrow (Blue circle in below image), then click the value. 3. Important: Select a value for each of the parameters that are showing for your measurement. Measure Single Data is measured for ALL stimulus conditions and then the channel goes to Hold. All data can be viewed using the individual Frequency and Power settings. Continuous Click to measure ALL stimulus data in real time. Click again or click Single to turn continuous OFF. Fast Single Remeasures the data that is already displayed. Does NOT measure data that is NOT displayed. Fast Continuous Continuously remeasures the data that is already displayed. This may be used to plot the waveform, output power, or DC at a fixed power, frequency, and bias and tune a circuit element to optimize match. When Triggering is enabled from the Stimulus menu, the Single and Continuous buttons will enable the measurement, but the measurement will not actually start until an external trigger is applied. See Also Select Response, then Phase Normalization to set the fundamental frequency of A1 wave as the reference. In the time domain, this causes the A1 wave to cross the Y axis at zero and all the other waves to be displayed relative to the A1 wave. This will remove any phase drift between measurements. Progress Bar Indicator 82

83 During continuous measurements or slow single measurements, a progress bar will popup indicating measurement status and estimated time remaining for the measurement. Click Stop to abort the measurement. For very slow measurements, the PNA-X firmware may become visible along with another dialog that can be used to abort the measurement. Select Waves / Parameters to Display To select waves and parameters to measure: Waves 1. Click Response, then Measure. 2. Then choose from Waves - Default setting - always available. (see below) Device Parameters (see below) S-Parameters - Learn more) Measured Variables (see below) X-Parameters - Learn about X-parameter display An = reference receiver for port n Bn = test port receiver for port n A1 Default setting. Input stimulus wave at Port 1 (DUT input) B1 Output response wave generated from Port 1 (DUT input) A2 Input stimulus wave at Port 2 reflected from load or generated by PNA-X second source (DUT output) B2 Output response wave generated from Port 2 (DUT output). All Waves All port waves displayed on the same plot. Quad display All four waves displayed in separate plots at the specified frequency and power. Ratios, Currents Launches the Customize Parameters dialog. Device Parameters Input Match (B1/A1) - same as S11 Gain (B2/A1) - same as S21 With X-Parameters enabled, the Device Parameters become: Input Match (XF1,1/ A1,1 ) 83

84 Gain (XF2,1/ A1,1) Distortion Parameters Available only in Multitone domain and when the sources are setup for 2-tone IMD measurement. Fundamental Tone Power - Measures the absolute power of the two fundamental tones. 3rd Order Tone Powers - Measures the absolute power of the third tones. 3rd Order IMD Products - Measures the difference in power level between the 3rd product tones and the fundamental tones. Output TOI - As the fundamental tone output power increases (black arrow below), output power in the third product tone increases at a predictable, and steeper, rate (green arrow below). At some point, the power in the 3rd product tone will be equal to the power in the main tone. The power level at which this occurs is known as the intercept point. Measuring this point directly is typically not possible. Therefore, it is calculated by measuring the main tone power and the third product tone power. The DUT Output power that is required to achieve the theoretical intercept point is calculated and displayed. Measured Variables Measured variables can be plotted after being configured in the Instrument Control dialog. To plot measured variables, click Response, then Measure, then Measured Variables When more than one variable is configured, then the following dialog is presented: 84

85 When Measured Variables are displayed, Sweeps is available under Domain on the Measurement Display toolbar. Last Modified: 7-Sep-2010 New topic 85

86 Setup Multitone Measurement using External Multitone Source In this topic: Configure Basic Multitone Measurement Configure a Total Power Measurement Configure a Per Tone Power Measurement Configure Basic Multitone Measurement The following procedure shows how to configure a Multitone measurement with the following properties: External Multitone Source 2 tones Using 2 Variables so that frequency and points can be changed easily. CenterFreq - step from 1 GHz to 2 GHz in 3 points. OffsetFreq - increases from 10 MHz to 20 MHz in 2 points. Description Select Multitone class Preset View config settings Select Hardware setup Action Click Response, then Measurement Class, then Multitone Click Utility, then Preset Click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 1. Under Hardware Setup, select External Multitone Src 2. Under Reference Source, select 10 MHz 3. Click View Setup, then configure your system as documented. Connect to Source Create Variables 1. In the Source Setup area, click Source Configuration 2. Enter the address of the external multitone source or click Search for Instruments. 3. Click Test Connection to verify the source is connected. 1. Click the Source Frequency Setup tab. 86

87 Configure tones 2. In the Variable Selection Configuration area, click View/Edit Sweep. 3. In the Variable Configuration dialog, make the following changes: 4. Click Add TWICE to add two variables (Var1 and Var2) 5. Select Var1 in the variables field. 6. Name field: change the name of Var1 to centerfreq 7. Number of Points: 3 8. Start: 1 G 9. Stop: 2 G 10. Select Var2 in the variables field. (Var1 changes to centerfreq) 11. Name field: change the name of Var2 to offsetfreq 12. Number of Points: Start:.01G 14. Stop:.02G 15. Click centerfreq to change the name of offsetfreq 16. Click OK 1. At the Source Frequency Setup tab: 2. In the Variable Selection area, select centerfreq 3. Next to Center Frequency: select Variable 4. In the Variable Selection area, select offsetfreq 5. Next to Frequency Spacing: select Variable 6. The Source Frequency Setup tab should appear as follows: Set Receiver Frequencies 1. Click Generate Fundamental Frequencies from Multitone Sources 2. When the message appears, click Yes to overwrite existing frequencies. 87

88 Evaluate Measurement Results Save the configuration to an *.ncm file. 3. Click OK 4. Click Apply 5. Click Single to perform the measurements. 1. Interpret the displayed results. Learn how. 2. If changes to the setup are required, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration to return to the Multitone Configuration dialog. 3. When acceptable results are displayed, click Response, then Calibration Wizard to perform a calibration. Learn how. 1. Click File, then Save 2. Enter a name for the 2-tone configuration, then press Save. Configure a Total Power Measurement The following procedure shows how to configure a total power multitone measurement: External Multitone Source 2 tones with -3 db offset between them Total power - 5 dbm Using 2 Variables so that frequency and points can be changed easily. CenterFreq - step from 1 GHz to 3 GHz in 3 points. freqspacing - 20 MHz to 20 MHz in 1 point. The multitone source power in this procedure is set to -5 dbm. The tone powers of the two tones will be adjusted such that the sum of the two tones equals -5 dbm while maintaining an offset of 3 db. Description Select Multitone class Preset View config settings Select Hardware setup Action Click Response, then Measurement Class, then Multitone Click Utility, then Preset Click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 1. Under Hardware Setup, select External Multitone Src 2. Under Reference Source, select 10 MHz 88

89 Connect to Source Set Source Power 1. In the Source Setup area, click Source Configuration 2. Enter the address of the external multitone source or click Search for Instruments. 3. Click Test Connection to verify the source is connected. 1. Click View Setup 2. Select the Source Power Setup tab 3. Set Start Power and Stop Power to -5 dbm 4. Set Power Points to 1 Create Variables 1. Click the Source Frequency Setup tab. 2. In the Variable Selection Configuration area, click View/Edit Sweep. 3. In the Variable Configuration dialog, make the following changes: 4. Click Add TWICE to add two variables (Var1 and Var2) 89

90 Configure tones 5. Select Var1 in the variables field. 6. Name field: change the name of Var1 to centerfreq 7. Number of Points: 3 8. Start: 1 G 9. Stop: 3 G 10. Select Var2 in the variables field. (Var1 changes to centerfreq) 11. Name field: change the name of Var2 to freqspacing 12. Number of Points: Start:.02G 14. Stop:.02G 15. Click centerfreq (Var2 changes to freqspacing) 16. Click OK 1. At the Source Frequency Setup tab: 2. Select Sweep total powers (at the bottom of the dialog) 3. In the Variable Selection area, select centerfreq 4. Next to Center Frequency: select Variable 5. In the Variable Selection area, select freqspacing 6. Next to Frequency Spacing: select Variable 7. Click in the Tone Power Offset field for the first tone and enter db to maintain an offset between the two tones. 8. The Source Frequency Setup tab should appear as follows: 90

91 Set Receiver Frequencies Evaluate Measurement Results Save the configuration to an *.ncm file. 1. Click Generate Fundamental Frequencies from Multitone Sources 2. When the message appears, click Yes to overwrite existing frequencies. 3. Click OK 4. Click Apply 5. Click Single to perform the measurements. 1. Interpret the displayed results. Learn how. 2. If changes to the setup are required, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration to return to the Multitone Configuration dialog. 3. When acceptable results are displayed, click Response, then Calibration Wizard to perform a calibration. Learn how. 1. Click File, then Save 2. Enter a name for the 2-tone configuration, then press Save. Configure a Per Tone Power Measurement The following procedure shows how to configure a per tone power multitone measurement: External Multitone Source 91

92 2 tones with one tone set to -10 dbm and the other tone swept from -20 dbm to 0 dbm in 3 points. Using 3 Variables so that frequency and points can be changed easily. CenterFreq - step from 1 GHz to 3 GHz in 3 points. freqspacing - 20 MHz to 20 MHz in 1 point. Var3 - swept from -20 dbm to 0 dbm Description Select Multitone class Preset View config settings Select Hardware setup Action Click Response, then Measurement Class, then Multitone Click Utility, then Preset Click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 1. Under Hardware Setup, select External Multitone Src 2. Under Reference Source, select 10 MHz Connect to Source Create Variables 1. In the Source Setup area, click Source Configuration 2. Enter the address of the external multitone source or click Search for Instruments. 3. Click Test Connection to verify the source is connected. 1. Click the Source Frequency Setup tab. 2. In the Variable Selection Configuration area, click View/Edit Sweep. 3. In the Variable Configuration dialog, make the following changes: 4. Click Add three times to add three variables (Var1, Var2, and Var3) 5. Select Var1 in the variables field. 6. Name field: change the name of Var1 to centerfreq 7. Number of Points: 3 8. Start: 1 G 9. Stop: 3 G 92

93 Configure tones 10. Select Var2 in the variables field. (Var1 changes to centerfreq) 11. Name field: change the name of Var2 to freqspacing 12. Number of Points: Start:.02G 14. Stop:.02G 15. Select Var3 in the variables field. (Var2 changes to freqspacing) 16. Number of Points: Start: Stop: Click OK 1. At the Source Frequency Setup tab: 2. Select Sweep power per tone (at the bottom of the dialog) 3. In the Variable Selection area, select centerfreq 4. Next to Center Frequency: select Variable 5. In the Variable Selection area, select freqspacing 6. Next to Frequency Spacing: select Variable 7. Click in the Tone Power field for the first tone and enter Var3. 8. The Source Frequency Setup tab should appear as follows: 93

94 Set Receiver Frequencies Evaluate Measurement Results Save the configuration to an *.ncm file. 1. Click Generate Fundamental Frequencies from Multitone Sources 2. When the message appears, click Yes to overwrite existing frequencies. 3. Click OK 4. Click Apply 5. Click Single to perform the measurements. 1. Interpret the displayed results. Learn how. 2. If changes to the setup are required, click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration to return to the Multitone Configuration dialog. 3. When acceptable results are displayed, click Response, then Calibration Wizard to perform a calibration. Learn how. 1. Click File, then Save 2. Enter a name for the 2-tone configuration, then press Save. Last Modified: 94

95 11-May Jan-2011 Added total power and per tone configuration procedures New topic 95

96 Setup Multitone Measurement using Internal Sources The following procedure is slightly different from the Preset configuration for Multitone measurement class when Internal sources are selected. This allows you to understand how to configure a Multitone measurement using variables so that receiver frequency and data points can be changed easily. The source fundamentals frequencies and data points are set in the Source Frequency dialog. CenterFreq - The center frequency (middle) of the two tones step to 1 GHz, 2 GHz, and 3 GHz. OffsetFreq - The two tones are separated by 20 MHz. This results in 3 pairs of fundamental frequencies (in GHz): ( ); ( ), (2.990 / 3.01). Note: Because the PNA-X only has two sources, X-parameter measurements are NOT allowed with this configuration. Configure Basic Multitone Measurement Description Select Multitone class Preset View config settings Select Hardware setup Action Click Response, then Measurement Class, then Multitone Click Utility, then Preset Click Stimulus, then Measurement Configuration 1. Under Hardware Setup, select Internal Sources. Click Yes for Default setup for "Internal Sources" Under Reference Source, select 10 MHz 3. Click View Setup, then configure your system as documented. Access Coupled Sweep 1. On the Measurement Configuration dialog, under Source Frequency, fund_1 and fund_2 are created by default. Click fund_1. 96

97 Configuration dialog 2. On the Multitone Measurement Setup dialog, (image below) Source Frequency Setup tab, select Sweep Type: Coupled. 3. Under Coupled Configuration, click the cell (highlighted below) Edit centerfreq Variable Edit freqspacing Variable Couple sweep for fund_1 1. On the Coupled Sweep Configuration dialog, click View/Edit Sweep. 2. Under Variables: select centerfreq. 3. Set Number of Points to 3 4. Next to Start, type 1G (1 GHz) 5. Next to Stop, type 3G (3 GHz) This example will have fixed spacing of 20 MHz between the two tones: fund_1 will be 10 MHz ABOVE the center frequency fund_2 will be 10 MHz BELOW the center frequency. 1. Under Variables: select freqspacing Note: To sweep the tone frequency spacing (this example has fixed spacing), enter the desired number of points (or steps) and the Start and Stop of the tone spacing. 3. Leave Number of Points at Next to Start, type 20M (CAPITAL M) 5. Next to Stop, type 20M (CAPITAL M) 6. Click OK 1. On the Coupled Sweep Configuration dialog, the following image shows the results of the "Couple Sweep for fund_1" step. Notice the offset Multiplier. This puts fund_1 at MINUS 1/2 the freqspacing variable, or - 10 MHz. 2. Click OK to close this dialog. 3. Click OK to close the Measurement Setup dialog. 97

98 Couple sweep for fund_2 1. Back on the Measurement Configuration dialog, select Source Frequency: fund_2. 2. Under Coupled Configuration, click the equation cell. 3. Notice the.500 offset Multiplier. This puts fund_1 at PLUS 1/2 the freqspacing variable, or +10 MHz. 4. Click OK Finish Save the configuration to an *.ncm file. 1. Notice the default settings for Maximum Order (fund_1 and fund_2 = 5) and Maximum Mixing Order (3). Learn more about these settings. 2. Click Apply 3. At the Standard Configuration warning, select Yes to have NVNA configure the switch settings automatically. 98

99 4. Click Single to make a measurement. 5. Select Format: SA Log Mag to see the following measurement display. 6. Click File, then Save 7. Enter a name for the 2-tone configuration, then press Save. Last Modified: 14-Jan-2011 New topic 99

100 Stimulus Settings Measurement Configuration (depends on Measurement Class) Averaging / Trigger Setup Source Attenuators Port Bypass Switches Source Out1 Low Band Mode Turn Off Measurement Port Powers Source On/Off after measurement (General Meas class ONLY) Pulse Generators Setup Last Modified: 4-Aug-2010 New topic 100

101 Source and Receiver Attenuation Click Stimulus, then Source Attenuators For general domain measurements, the following dialog is displayed for attenuator settings: Source attenuators are between the couplers (default) - With this option selected, the attenuator settings cannot be changed after calibration or errors will be introduced in the measurement. Also, the automatic source power reduction during calibration is disabled. 101

102 Source attenuators are behind the couplers (external couplers) - With this option selected, attenuator settings can be modified during calibration and also during the measurement without introducing errors. Auto range during calibration - With this option selected, source power is automatically reduced during calibration and restored during the measurement. Source power reduction is set using Source Offset in the Calibration Wizard. For all other modes of operation, the following dialog is displayed for attenuator settings: Source Attenuators dialog box help Source Attenuation is used to attenuate power from the PNA-X internal sources. Also use attenuation when a measurement requires a very good impedance match with the source, such as with oscillators or conditionally unstable amplifiers. Choose an attenuation level of 10 db or more to ensure the best source match. Modifying the source attenuator values will invalidate any existing calibration. Source Attenuation is not automatically calculated. If Unleveled warnings appear, modify the attenuation value or decrease the range of a power sweep. Receiver Attenuation Click Response, then Receiver Attenuation. or Click Stimulus, then Source Attenuators, then Receiver Attenuators. 102

103 Receiver Attenuation dialog box help Set the Attenuation at the specified test port receiver. Learn more about receiver attenuation. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Modifying the test port attenuator values will invalidate the calibration. Receiver attenuation is usually selected to avoid overpowering the PNA-X receiver. The receivers start to compress at about +10 dbm. However, spurious receiver harmonics may become evident between -10 dbm and -20 dbm at the receiver input ports. Therefore, it is recommended that for optimum nonlinear measurement performance, the maximum power at the receiver input should be between -10 dbm and -20 dbm. Test port 1 = Receiver A Test port 2 = Receiver B Test port 3 = Receiver C Test port 4 = Receiver D Turn Off Measurement Port Powers Click Stimulus, then Turn Off Measurement Port Powers. This will immediately turn off all power at all test ports. It will not affect phase reference source power or any external sources. Last Modified: 12-May-2017 New topic 103

104 Trigger Setup and Averaging To launch the following dialog: Click Stimulus, then Averaging/Trigger Setup. or From any Measurement Configuration dialog, click the Avg/Trigger Setup button. Meas Trigger Setup dialog box help This dialog is used to setup and enable EXTERNAL triggering. Enable Triggering Check to enable external triggering. Trigger delay After an external trigger is received, the start of the sweep is held off for this specified amount of time plus any inherent latency. Source The PNA-X accepts trigger input signals through one of the following rearpanel connectors: Meas Trig IN BNC (Ext Trigger I/O) Handler I/O Pin 18 See these PNA-X rear-panel connectors. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Level / Edge Use Level triggering when sweep triggering is desired. The measurement will be in free run mode when the trigger is at the indicated level. This is useful for automated testing. Use Edge triggering when point triggering is desired. The measurement will proceed one point at a time for each detected trigger Edge until complete. This is useful for point-in-pulse measurements of pulsed amplifiers. Set the trigger delay and IF Bandwidth appropriately to capture the flattest portion of the pulse. 104

105 High Level The PNA-X is triggered when it is armed (ready for trigger) and the TTL signal at the select input is HIGH. Low Level The PNA-X is triggered when it is armed (ready for trigger) and the TTL signal at the select input is LOW. Positive Edge After the PNA-X arms, it will trigger on the next positive edge. Negative Edge After the PNA-X arms, it will trigger on the next negative edge. Averaging Tab dialog box help Sweep averaging reduces the effects of random noise on a measurement. The NVNA computes each data point based on the average of the same data point over several consecutive sweeps. You determine the number of consecutive sweeps by setting the Average factor. The higher the average factor, the greater the amount of noise reduction. When Single trigger is performed, the NVNA performs this number of sweeps in order to complete one valid averaged sweep. Enable Averaging Check to perform averaging. Averages Increase number of averages to reduce trace noise and increase dynamic range. This also increases measurement time. Last Modified: 30-Apr-2008 New topic 105

106 Port 1 Bypass Switch Available with PNA-X option 423, the Port Bypass Switches selects the source path. The applications are too numerous to list, but as an example, selecting the Port 1 and Port 3 Combiner path is useful in the following situations: Using an external amplifier to boost port power. Place the amplifier from J11 to J10 and do not exceed the maximum allowable input power to J10. Adding an external source for multitone measurements. Connect to J10 or J9 depending on desired configuration. To access the Port Bypass Switches: Click Stimulus, then Port Bypass Switches 106

107 Last Modified: 2-Sep-2010 New topic 107

108 Limit Measurement BW With NVNA, the fundamental frequency is specified, but harmonic measurements can occur at much higher frequencies. By default, the frequency limits are the low and high frequency range of the PNA. However, to reduce measurement time, you can further limit measurement frequencies using this dialog. Click Utility then Limit Measurement Bandwidth to access this dialog: 108

109 External Source Configuration The External Source Configuration dialog is used to establish a connection, and if necessary, modify commands that are sent between the PNA-X and External RF Sources. Note: To configure an external instrument (such as a DC voltmeter), use the Instrument Control dialog. How to access this dialog: From the Multitone Measurement Configuration dialog: 1. In the Source Setup area, click one of the Source Configuration cells 2. Click Source Type: External Source From the Mixer Measurement Configuration dialog: 1. Click Hardware Setup then choose either External LO or External Input. 2. Next to the LO or Input, click Configure Source button. External Source Configuration dialog box help When making a connection with the RF Source, there is no need to specify the Model. All Keysight MXG and ESG, (some PSG) sources use the same SCPI commands listed in the Instrument Properties field. Other manufacturer's RF sources may work with some of the commands listed below, but modification is probably necessary. 1. Click Address in the Instrument Properties to show the Search for Instruments, Test Connection, and Identify Instrument buttons. Note: To send commands to the PNA, enter address -1. This can be useful for configuring a 'dummy' source for experimental purposes. When doing this, remove the Property Values for all command types listed in the Instrument Properties field. 109

110 OR.. 2. Click Search for Instruments to scan GPIB and LAN for instruments. 3. When Instruments Found appears, select an instrument, then click OK. That address is added to the Property Value for the source. 4. Click Test Connection and Identify Instrument to validate the correct source. Note: In NVNA 1.0, the GPIB (NOT VISA) addresses were listed and also saved with instrument state (*.ncm) and source configuration (*.scfg) files. When these files are recalled into later VNA releases, to make changes to the source configuration files, you must either change the address to a simple GPIB address (for example, 19) or change the command properties to the newer Write: <command> syntax. Commands Note: When communicating with Keysight MXG, ESG, some PSGs sources, it is usually NOT necessary to send or modify the following commands. However, if problems occur, you can view and modify these commands to the syntax that is expected by the source. Refer to the source programming documentation for more details. Initialization Commands Commands sent immediately after opening a session to the instrument. These commands are sent only once per session. If necessary, use the following groups of commands to modify communication with the source. Click a group, then modify the individual commands as necessary. Set Power, Set Frequency, Source ON / OFF, Multitone Table Setup, Multitone Row Setup, Multitone On / OFF. The Multitone commands require that the source have the appropriate Multitone option. Closing Commands Commands sent immediately before closing a session to the instrument. These commands are sent only once per session. Timeout Contains the amount of time (in ms) to wait for a response when opening a session with the instrument. About the Commands The commands stored in the various Command fields are sent directly to the SCPI String Parser of the PNA-X, so must contain fully qualified commands. Before the commands are sent, references to %INST% are replaced by the session ID of the connection to the instrument. The Write to Instrument and Read from Instrument buttons will automatically insert fully qualified write and read commands to which any needed arguments may be added. During the Outer Loop Commands, references to the swept variables in the form %n% where n is the index of the variable as listed in the Swept Variable field are replaced by the values of those variables in the current iteration of the loop. Buttons 110

111 Write to Instrument Sends command string to the instrument. Read from Instrument Reads query response from the instrument. Wait Statement Sends wait command to the instrument. Save Instrument to File Saves the current source configuration settings to a *.scfg (source configuration) file on the PNA-X hard drive. Load Instrument from File Recalls a previously saved Instrument *.scfg (source configuration) file from the PNA-X hard drive. Insert Variable Reference Some commands are sent with variables that contain the values that are set in the configuration dialogs. Select a variable, then click Insert Variable. The variable is inserted into the command at the cursor location in the Property Value field. Last Modified: 18-Nov-2010 New topic 111

112 Pulse Measurements Pulse measurements are made using the PNA-X internal pulse generators, available with PNA-X Opt 025 (N524xA) S93025A (N524xB). Source modulators are available with Opts 021 and 022. Pulse measurements can be made with or without X-Parameter extraction. When X- Parameters are pulsed, both the main source and the extraction source are pulsed. Pulse measurements can be made in General and Multitone measurement classes. All NVNA pulse measurements are made in a 'hybrid' mode, using the wideband hardware path and narrowband signal processing. The standard measurement IFBW is ignored in favor of the custom filters which are used with Pulse measurements. New See How to make Pulse Profile Measurements How to make Pulse Measurements: Click Stimulus, then Pulse Setup to access the following dialog. Pulse Setup dialog box help Learn all about the Pulse Generators (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Internal Pulse Generators The internal pulse generators can be used to modulate the PNA sources or trigger an external pulse generator by connecting to the Pulse I/O connector on the PNA rearpanel. Learn more. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) For each Pulse Generator, configure the width, delay, and polarity. 112

113 D = Delay; the time before each pulse begins W = Width; the time the pulse is ON Duty Cycle = W/P Invert Check to cause the pulse ON time to be active low and OFF be active high. Enable Check to turn on the Pulse Generator. Pulse Period First enable any of the pulse generators. Then make the following settings which are used to gate the NVNA receivers. When the receivers are gated for a measurement, F appears in the Status Bar. Pulse Period Time of one complete pulse cycle. Pulse Frequency (PRF) = 1/Period Note: The DSP Version will affect the minimum and maximum settings in this dialog. To see the DSP version, on the PNA (NOT NVNA), click Help, then About. PNA models with DSP version 4: Minimum Acquisition Window = 200 ns Maximum Acquisition Window = 34 us Minimum Pulse Period = 9 us Maximum Pulse Period = 17 ms PNA models with DSP version 5: Minimum Acquisition Window = 200 ns. Maximum Acquisition Window = ~327us (varies with setup parameters) Minimum Pulse Period = 9 us Maximum Pulse Period = 1 s Note: For both DSP4 and DSP5, once the requested input parameters are selected, a calculation is performed to see if the configuration can be measured. Noise Bandwidth may be automatically adjusted to wider values as needed for low duty cycle pulses. There may be some requested configurations which are not possible to measure. A warning will appear to notify you that the specified configuration is not supported. Receiver Settings Acquisition Delay Time to wait after the start of a pulse before making a receiver measurement. Noise Bandwidth NVNA uses custom IF Bandwidths to make pulsed measurements. The NVNA uses the entered noise bandwidth value to compute a custom bandwidth that results in approximately the same noise level as a CW stimulus measurement. Smaller values result in lower noise and longer measurement time. 113

114 Acquisition Window Time to make a single pulsed measurement. The minimum Acquisition time is set by the phase reference PRF. To reduce the minimum acquisition time, increase the phase reference PRF. Important - Press Calculate to recalculate new receiver settings. Internal Pulse Modulators Check to enable one or both internal source modulators. When a source is modulated, P appears in the Status Bar. Modulator Drive Choose a pulse generator to modulate the specified source. Choose from: CW (NO modulation) Pulse 1, 2, 3, 4 How to make Pulse Profile Measurements The NVNA Pulse Profile display may NOT show you the entire pulse for long pulses. It is designed to show you when the pulse has stabilized so that you can determine where in the pulse you can make point-in-pulse measurements. If X-parameters are enabled, disable the X-parameters for the pulse profile measurement. Click Analysis, then Configure X-Parameters, then clear Enable. On the above Pulse Setup dialog, configure the standard pulse settings. Under Pulse Profile, for Profile Delay Variable, select Acquisition Delay Click Enable Pulse Profile. Click Apply to apply these setup changes. From the measurement display, select or add an active window. Click Response, then Measurement, then Waves, then An or Bn waves. In the upper left corner of the measurement screen, click Domain, then select Profile. The following toolbar will appear: From the measurement display, change the Start Time, Stop Time, or Step Size to adjust the measurement as needed. Note: The minimum Start Time is 0 ps (zero). To show the beginning of the pulse, increase the Delay setting for the selected Pulse Generator. Click Measure, then Single to trigger a sweep. Optional: 114

115 Right-click the display, then click Marker, then Marker n to create a marker. Move the marker to the flat part of the pulse. Again, right-click the display, then click Marker, then Marker-> Delay to set the Acquisition Delay on the Pulse Setup dialog to the X-axis position of the marker. Last Modified: 4-Mar Dec Oct Sep Jun-2011 Added hybrid mode Added Pulse Profile Updated again Modified dialog New topic 115

116 High Power Pulse Measurements The following are general rules of thumb to consider when making High Power Pulse measurements. For more information on High Power NVNA measurements, see App Note High power will cause damage due to heating, overvoltage, and over-current. Heating is usually the main problem, followed by overvoltage. 2. A signal with power level P and duty cycle D will have an average power of P*D. For example, 100W with 10% duty cycle has an average power of 10W. From this, it may appear that you can apply big pulses to smaller devices without problems, but there are a few issues: Some devices may be damaged due to overvoltage. Depending on the heat sinking and heat flow, a fast pulse rate (like 1MHz) may not cause heating but a slow pulse rate (like 1Hz) may be disastrous. Devices will have a peak power limit which is independent of heating. Fast/sharp pulses may cause transients in the DUT or system. 3. Many devices are specified for max power (CW) and max power (pulsed). The pulsed power should specify duty cycle and pulse rate limitations that must be respected. 4. The PNA-X is NOT currently specified for max pulsed power levels higher than the max CW power levels. Last Modified: 2-Sep-2010 New topic 116

117 Variable Configuration Dialog The Variable Configuration dialog can be used in many NVNA configurations to substitute a configured variable for a fixed value. To start this dialog: From the Instruments dialog, it can be accessed by clicking Swept Variables From the Multitone Configuration dialog, Source Frequency Setup tab, with Source Frequency = Multitone Source, click View / Edit Sweep. After a variable has already been added, from the Multitone Configuration dialog, click a variable in the Swept Variable Setup grid. See Also Learn how to Couple a Fundamental Frequency to a Swept Variable Variable Configuration dialog box help Important: See a procedure that shows how to use this dialog to Setup a Multitone Measurement using Internal Sources. Variables: Displays the names of configured variables. Click Add or Remove to modify the list of configured variables. Selected Variable Name: Modify the variable name to one that is easily recognized. After a modification, click a different name in the list of variables on the left to see the new name appear on the list. Sweep Setup: Number of Points: Choose the number of data points to measure between the Start and Stop frequencies. 117

118 Start and Stop: Enter the Start and Stop frequencies to measure. Note: To enter MHz, type CAPITAL M (to differentiate from the milli prefix.) Choose either Number of Points or Step to determine the data point frequencies between the Start and Stop frequencies. Units: Appended to the variable values if the instrument requires them. Check Units, then enter the appropriate units in the text field. This is NOT required for most Keysight sources. Sweep Type: Linear: Data points are evenly spaced between the Start and Stop frequencies. Log: Data points are logarithmically spaced between the Start and Stop frequencies. Point Sweep Each line contains one value for the variable. Use Intermediate Files Use with large multidimensional sweeps that may generate too much data to store in memory. Check this box to cause the instrument to write a file for each swept variable condition, clear the data from memory, and continue to the next swept variable condition. Measurement Sets per File Specify the number of measurement sets to store in each file. Press OK, then select a directory in which files are saved, then enter a filename prefix. Individual filenames will be automatically appended with the swept variable value. New files automatically overwrite existing files, so it may be necessary to first create a new directory to avoid losing data. This setting MUST be checked before X-parameters can be extracted from files. Learn how. Instrument Dependencies To avoid losing the sweep settings, removing an instrument that depends on a variable does not automatically remove the variables. Variables that are still used by instruments cannot be removed until all instruments using them are removed or the variable is removed from the Swept Variable field of those instruments. Last Modified: 3-Sep-2010 New topic 118

119 Source Out1 Low Band Mode To access the following Source 1 and Source 2 Out1 Low Band Mode dialog: Click Stimulus, then Source Out1 Low Band Mode For Source1 and Source 2 (Src1 and Src2) Out 1 Low Band Filtered: Extra filtering lowers harmonics below 3.2 GHz. High Power: These filters are not used. Last Modified: 26-May-2011 Converted Path config 119

120 120

121 RF On Delay Delays turning on the RF source by a specified amount. To specify the RF On Delay Click Stimulus, then RF On Delay RF On Delay dialog box help Delay - Specify the delay before turning on the RF source. 121

122 Power Limit Limits the source power at each test port for ALL channels. Use this feature to protect DUTs that are sensitive to overpowering at the input. Power levels that exceed the limit at the specified port are clipped at the limit and an error message is displayed on the screen. To specify the Power Limit Click Stimulus, then Power Limit Power Limit dialog box help Limits the source power at each test port for ALL channels. Use this feature to protect DUTs that are sensitive to overpowering at the input. Power levels that exceed the limit at the specified port are clipped at the limit and an error message is displayed on the screen. State / Limit ON - Power is limited to the adjacent value at the specified source port. OFF - Power is NOT limited to this value, but to the maximum power of the source. Important Note: The power limit on the PNA and the NVNA are NOT coupled. In other word, you can set independently the power limit / state from the NVNA or from the PNA. The following table summarize the 3 cases for the power limit: Power Limit Status under the PNA Power Limit Status Power Limit under the NVNA ON OFF The power limit value will be set by the PNA application OFF ON The power limit value will be set by the NVNA application ON ON The power limit value will be set by the application that has the smallest power limit value 122

123 123

124 Response Settings The following features are accessed from the Response menu: Measurement Class (separate topic) Calibration (separate topic) Format Scale Display menu (separate topic) Receiver Attenuation (separate topic) Receiver Path (separate topic) Port 1 Reference Mixer Switch Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch Phase Normalization Phase Offset Couple Segments Format To select a format for the Measurement Display: Click Response, then Format or Select Format from the Measurement Display toolbar. Log Mag Data is displayed in units of dbm as incident or reflected power. All other parameters are in db. Phase Displayed in degrees. At -180 degrees, the data point becomes +180 degrees for scaling purposes. Unwrapped Phase Displayed in degrees. Phase is displayed with NO wrapping at -180 degrees. Group Delay Displays signal transmission (propagation) time (in seconds) through a device. Also, specify Group Delay Aperture. Learn more. Polar All parameters displayed as real or imaginary parts of the complex data. Linear Mag A and B waves are displayed in units of Watts as incident or reflected power. Voltages and Currents are displayed as peak if LSNA format is selected or rms if NVNA format is selected from the Wave Definition dialog.. All other parameters are displayed as linear magnitude of the complex data. 124

125 Real Format Displays only the real (resistive) portion of the measured complex data, which can be both positive and negative values. The Y axis is Unitless. Imaginary Format Displays only the imaginary (reactive) portion of the measured data. The Y-axis is Unitless. SA Log Mag Data is displayed as vertical lines in dbm. SA Linear Mag Data is displayed as vertical lines in Watts. About SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Formats Scale Use Point and Drag feature to display a single set of multitone responses. In many cases, a standard spectrum analyzer would display noise between tones. The NVNA displays nothing because the receivers are not tuned to frequencies between the tones. This does NOT mean that no spurious signals are present. In some cases, such as zero span, a standard spectrum analyzer would connect data points with a line. In these cases, the NVNA also connects the data points with a straight line. For example, when source power is plotted on the X-axis, we would expect there to be a harmonic output if the source were on and set to one of the intermediate power levels like 3 dbm. The measurement would probably be somewhere between the measurements taken at 2 and 4 dbm. When Domain: Power or DC Bias is selected, the display is consistent with what a spectrum analyzer would display in zero span mode while source power/dc bias was swept. To start the following dialog: Click Response then Scale or Right-click on any measurement window Scale dialog box help 125

126 Scale Per Division Sets the value of the Y-axis divisions of the measurement plot Autoscale - Automatically sets value of the Y-axis divisions and reference value to fit the traces within the grid area of the screen. The stimulus values and reference position are not affected. The NVNA determines the smallest possible scale factor that will allow all the displayed data to fit onto 80 percent of the vertical grid. The reference level is chosen to center the trace on the screen. Reference Level Sets the value of the reference line. Range: -500 db to 500 db. Position In rectangular formats, sets the position of the reference line. Zero is the bottom line of the screen and ten is the top line. Default position is five (middle). Autoscale when display data set changes Port 1 Reference Mixer Switch Click Response, then Port 1 Reference Mixer Switch Port 1 Reference Mixer Switch dialog box help Select the path to use for the R1 receiver in general domain measurements. Internal Path is used to bypass the front panel jumper. This allows general domain measurements to be made while configured in envelope domain mode (Source Out Ref 1 connected to Receiver D input by a cable on the front panel), but does not allow use of an external coupler for a1. External Path allows direct access to the R1 receiver from the front panel, enabling use of external couplers if desired. In this mode, switching between general domain and envelope domain measurements requires physical changes to front panel cables/jumpers. This setting is the Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch on the Path Configuration dialog in the PNA-X firmware. Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch 126

127 Click Response, then Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch dialog box help Noise Figure measurements are NOT allowed in the NVNA. This dialog is provided as a convenience for PNA Noise Figure customers to allow the Tuner to be connected while making NVNA measurements. The Noise Tuner Switch dialog shows different settings depending on your PNA model and Noise Figure option GHz and below (Opt N524xA/S93029A - N524xB) and 50 GHz (Opt H29) Internal - Use for NVNA measurements. External - Designed to route source power through an external component (or Tuner) that is connected to the front-panel. In the following image of the Noise Path Configuration dialog in the 26.5 GHz PNA-X, the orange line between CPLR THRU and SRC OUT represents the Noise Tuner (ECal module). 127

128 50 GHz (Opt 029 N524xA/S93029A - N524xB) Tuner Path - Not Available. Bypass Path - Use for NVNA measurements. Phase Normalization Click Response, then Phase Normalization then Enable When enabled, Phase Normalization causes the selected fundamental wave (A1 wave and so forth) to cross the Y axis at zero, and all the other waves to be displayed relative to the selected wave. By default, all the waves are normalized to the input fundamental frequency (A1 wave) when phase normalization is enabled. Also, they can be normalized to the output fundamental frequency (B2 wave), or A2, B1 wave. Phase Offset Click Response, then Phase Normalization then Phase Offset 128

129 Select Phase Offset to assign an arbitrary phase offset (-180 to 180 ) to the fundamental wave to specify the phase at the zero crossing point. Couple Segments (Receiver only) NOT available in Envelope Measurement Class. Click Response, then Couple Segments When checked / enabled, Couple Segments causes all segments to be combined into a single sweep. Power settings are disabled. There are three primary measurement setups when Couple Segments is enabled: Calibration Verification When S-parameters are enabled, Couple Segments can be used for small-signal calibration verification. An S-parameter sweep is performed that includes each frequency in the measurement setup. Multi-tone measurement using external stimulus When S-parameters are disabled, multitone measurements are enabled by default. In this mode, an external multitone stimulus may be applied at the PNA-X rear-panel J10 input. GPIB Instrument Configuration may be used to control the external sources. Note: The new Multitone measurement class greatly simplifies external source control and multitone measurement setup, and enables more complex measurements including two-tone X- parameters. Oscilloscope emulation mode Alternatively, the instrument may function similarly to an equivalent-time oscilloscope by connecting a DUT to either test port, performing a measurement, and viewing it in the time domain. The DUT must either generate a stimulus or be driven by an external stimulus. In each of these modes, care must be taken to ensure that all frequencies of interest are included in the measurement setup. If there is significant energy content in a frequency that is not measured, the results will not be accurate. When using external stimulus, all sources must be connected to the 10 MHz Reference on the back panel of the PNA. 129

130 Last Modified: 9-Nov Feb Jul Apr-2008 Couple Segments not allowed in Env. Added Phase Offset Added Port1 Ref Mixer New topic 130

131 Measurement Class The measurement class dialog allows you to choose between four different types of measurements. Only one measurement class can be present at a time. To start the Measurement Class Dialog: Click Response, then Measurement Class Each measurement class shows a corresponding connection diagram and list of measurements. Learn more about: General Measurements Envelope Measurements Multitone Measurements Mixer / Converter Measurements See Also Phase Reference Setup Last Modified: 28-Jul Apr-2008 New dialog New topic 131

132 132

133 Calibration The NVNA Calibration Wizard guides you through a three-step Full NVNA Calibration. 1. Vector Calibration gathers 12-term error terms and converts them to 8-term errors, ignoring isolation terms. This portion of the Cal can be recalled separately from a previous vector calibration. 2. Phase Calibration using phase reference. 3. Receiver Amplitude Calibration using power sensor. The calibration process is the same for all measurement classes. Calibrations that were performed for General, Multitone, Mixer, or Envelope measurement classes are NOT compatible with other measurement classes. See Also Source Power Cal - Adjusts the power level to be accurate at the reference plane. Cal Power - Sets the power level at which the Vector Cal is performed. Cal Sets - Learn about Full NVNA and Vector Cal Sets (separate topic). Fixture De-embedding - Removes the effects of a fixture from the measurement results (separate topic). Power Limit - Limits source power at each test port for ALL channels. The NVNA Cal Wizard To start the NVNA Cal Wizard Click Response, then Calibration Wizard Before Calibrating 1. Completely setup and Apply all measurement settings. Calibrations are interpolated by default. Therefore, you can change frequency settings to a subset of the calibrated frequency points and maintain correction. Learn about Interpolation in the PNA-X Help file. 2. For highest accuracy, use Fixturing to remove the effects any adapters or cables that may be required to connect the phase reference or power sensor to the calibration plane. 133

134 Click Load CalSet to recall a Full NVNA Cal Set. Learn more. NVNA Cal Wizard Start dialog box help red - indicates the calibration portions that have NOT finished. blue indicates a calibration is in process. green - indicates the calibration portions that HAVE finished. Vector Calibration must be performed first. Click Load to recall Cal Set data from a previously-performed calibration. However, the stimulus settings for the Cal Set must match the current stimulus settings, and the necessary frequencies must all be contained in the Cal Set. There is NO interpolation. 134

135 Only the Vector Calibration may be recalled using Load. To recall a complete NVNA calibration, click File, then Recall. Depending on system configuration choices, the DUT is connected to: PNA-X ports 1 and 3 when using an external source to drive the phase reference. PNA-X ports 1 and 2 when using the PNA-X internal 2nd source to drive the phase reference. Calibrate Source Power Check to perform as part of the Vector Calibration. The results can also be saved and later recalled with the Cal Set. Important Note Remember the PNA-X port numbers being calibrated. The Vector Calibration port numbers are indicated by the RED circle in the above image. You MUST enter these port numbers (in any order) on the following page. The Phase Cal, the Receiver Amplitude Cal, and 1-port Coaxial Vector Cal (if selected) are ALL performed at the port number indicated by the BLUE circle in the above image. On-Wafer Calibration Notes: 1. Check Wafer/In-fixture Calibration to indicate that you want to perform On- Wafer Calibration completely within NVNA. This requires a 2-port cal AND a 1-port cal. 2. Select 1-port Coaxial Vector Calibration to perform or load a 1-port calibration at the coax connection for the port number indicated by the BLUE circle in the above image. 3. Select Vector Calibration to perform or load a 2-port calibration (at the ports indicated by the RED circle in above image) at the substrate using onwafer standards. 4. Perform the Phase Cal and Receiver Amplitude Cal. 5. After calibration, the measurements show only DUT performance - without the effects of the probes. The two probes must be reciprocal (S21 = S12). You can also perform an On-Wafer cal by de-embedding an S2P file of the probes. 135

136 The Phase Cal and Receiver Amplitude Cal must be performed on the same port indicated by the BLUE circle in the above image. Either Port 1 or Port 3 when using an external source- OR Either Port 1 or Port 2 when using the PNA-X internal second source. They can be performed in any order after the Vector Cal. To launch the Vector Cal Wizard, click Next, or click the Red button under Select Calibration Standard. The following dialog applies to the N524xA models only. For the N524xB models, the calibration process automatically selects SmartCal and the Selected Ports for Guided Calibration dialog. Click Help at any step to launch the PNA-X Help file. Select the calibration method: Calibration Plane Manager Click Response, then Cal, then Start Cal, then Cal Plan Manager Or Click Response, then Cal, then Fixturing, then Cal Plan Manager The NVNA Cal Plan Manager is only enabled when passive tuners have been added from the external instrument configuration. It will additionally read the tuner configuration to see if the couplers are in front or behind the tuners and apply the correct de-embedding. Calibration Plane Manager dialog box help 136

137 The Calibration Plane Manager is a tool that allow you to specify the NVNA calibration reference plane. You can select the NVNA calibration plane from one of the three possible positions 1, 2 and 3. For the Source and Load side, the tuners and tuner front blocks defined in the external instrument will be automatically loaded in this dialog. Tuner Characterization File: Populate the tuner characterization file that is specified and defined in the tuner configuration. This applicable for the source and load side. Tuner Front Block: For the Source and Load sides, populate the tuner front block that is specified and defined in the tuner configuration (*.S2P file). Examples of Tuner Front Block could be a couplers, Bias tees, Adapters, etc. NVNA Front Block: For the Source and Load sides, populate or specify the NVNA front block (*.S2P file). Examples of NVNA Front Block could be a Fixture, Adapters, etc. NVNA Cal Plane: Specify the NVNA calibration reference plane. "1". You can perform an NVNA calibration at the output ports of the tuners then during the measurement, automatically if applicable, de-embed the tuner front block and the NVNA front block. 2. You can perform an NVNA calibration at the output ports of the tuners front block, then during the measurement, automatically if applicable, de-embed the NVNA front block. Click then navigate to and select the *.s2p file for the NVNA front block for the source and load side. 3. You can perform an NVNA calibration right at the DUT reference plane. In this case the NVNA Front Block will be grayed out because the calibration and the measurement reference plane are the same. SmartCal (Guided Calibration) 137

138 This method provides a step-by-step "wizard" interface. You describe the connectors on your DUT and the cal kits you will use; it walks you through the most accurate calibration possible. Supports ALL Cals EXCEPT simple open, short, and thru response Cals. Use a different Cal Kit (including ECal) for each port. Unguided Calibration This method provides a familiar calibration interface, but with limited capability. You choose the type of cal to perform; it allows you the flexibility to measure the standards in any order. Supports all Cals EXCEPT full 3-port, full 4-port. TRL is NOT supported on multiport PNAs. Only one Cal Kit can be used. Can NOT use Offset Load standard. Use Electronic Calibration This method provides fast, software-controlled calibrations. Only one ECal module can be used. Use SmartCal when more than one ECal module is needed. Vector Calibration dialog box help The ports to be calibrated are listed on the previous Cal page. Select 2 Port Cal. Then: Select ports 1 and 3 in any order when using an external source to drive the phase reference. Select ports 1 and 2 in any order when using a PNA-X internal 2nd source to drive the phase reference. All PNA-X Calibration features are supported in NVNA. Read PNA-X Help for help with this dialog, and the remaining dialogs for PNA-X Vector Calibration. Click Back to return to NVNA Help. Phase Calibration Phase Calibration Configuration dialog box help 138

139 These settings are available ONLY after a Vector Cal is complete. Remove Receiver Attenuation - Check to set receiver attenuation to zero for only the phase calibration. Use External Attenuator - Check to indicate that you have connected external attenuation between the PNA-X coupler and receiver. The following extra two steps are required to measure the effects of the external attenuation. Use an adapter if necessary. Enable Averaging Check and enter a number of phase measurements to average. The higher the value, the more accurate the phase measurement, and the slower the calibration. Phase Cal - Measure Thru dialog box help 139

140 When Use External Attenuator is checked in the previous dialog, it indicates that you have connected external attenuation between the PNA-X coupler and receiver. Connect port 1 to the port number specified in the dialog, with an adapter if necessary, then click Next. Phase Cal - Remove Attenuator dialog box help This is the second step in the process of characterizing the external attenuator. Remove the External Attenuator, click Next, then add the attenuator back to your cal setup. Select Phase Reference Module dialog box help 140

141 Two phase references are connected to the USB. Select the phase reference that will be used for calibration then click Next. If an unsupported phase reference will be used, click Next without selecting a phase reference. You will then be prompted to load a custom phase calibration file. To learn more, see Custom Phase Calibration file format. Connect the Calibration Phase Reference OUTPUT to the selected PNA-X test port calibration reference plane. If an adapter is needed, see Fixture De-embedding. Receiver Amplitude Calibration Receiver Amplitude Calibration dialog box help 141

142 This dialog may look slightly different depending on the PNA-X Firmware revision. Amplitude Calibration Power - Sets the internal source power at which to calibrate the receivers. The Receiver Amplitude Cal calibrates the NVNA measurement receivers for absolute power using a power sensor. This power sensor measurement is compared with the receiver measurement and subsequent receiver measurements are adjusted by the difference. The source power is NOT corrected in this step, but in the Source Power Cal. During the Source Power Cal, the calibrated receivers are used to accurately set the source power level. The power level that is specified here is the setting of the internal source. There are a couple of reasons that you might change these settings: 1. The power sensor that is used may have power limitations (typically +20 dbm). However, best accuracy is often attained at about 0 dbm. 2. If an external component is used in the measurement path, you MUST adjust this internal source power setting to compensate for these components. For example, if you want 0 dbm at the calibration plane and you have a 30 db amp in the path, you will need to set the Source Offset to +30 dbm for this calibration. This will set the internal source power to -30 dbm. Click Sensor Settings to perform a ONE-TIME power sensor configuration. Learn how. Sensor - Select a configured power sensor with which to perform the calibration. Start / Stop Frequency - Enter the frequency range of the Power Sensor (NOT the frequency range of the measurement). 142

143 Add Sensor - Adds another sensor to cover the frequency range of the measurement. Delete Sensor - Removes the selected sensor from the table. Click Next, then follow the prompts to make the amplitude calibration. Cal Finished dialog box help This Cal Wizard page appears when all three NVNA calibrations are complete. Optional: Click Save As CalSet to save the full NVNA Calibration. Once saved, this cal can be applied to measurements with similar setups and measurement frequencies. Learn more. Click OK to end the calibration process. When a Calibration is finished, Cal appears in the lower-right corner. Error terms may be viewed by clicking Cal. Learn more. Correction Status "Calibration" is a term used to describe the process of measuring and calculating error terms. "Correction" is a term used to describe the application of those error terms to a measurement. Check the correction status of a measurement by looking in the lower-right corner of the NVNA status bar. Cal appears when correction is ON and measurement settings have not changed since the cal was performed or applied. 143

144 indicates that one or more settings have changed since the cal was performed, such as IFBW, power settings, or measurement frequencies. However, the Cal is still valid and includes all currently configured measurement frequencies. **Cal. (blank space) appears when correction is OFF. Correction is automatically turned ON when a calibration has been performed or a Cal Set applied. Click Response, then Cal, then Correction ON/off to turn correction OFF. Cal Power Click Response, then Cal, then Start Cal, then Cal Power Calibration Port Power dialog box help Port <n> internal source power - Specify the internal source power level that will be applied to each port. These power levels are only applied during the Vector Cal. If an external component is used in the measurement path, you MUST adjust this internal source power setting to compensate for these components. For example, if you want 0 dbm at the calibration plane and you have a 30 db amp in the path, you will need to set the Source Offset to +30 dbm for this calibration. This will set the internal source power to -30 dbm. Note: The power presented to an ECal module should be limited to -5 dbm to avoid compression of the calibration standards inside the modules. Source Power Cal A Source Power Cal can be performed independently AFTER performing a Full NVNA calibration. The Source Power Cal assumes that the PNA-X reference receivers have already been calibrated from an Receiver Amplitude Cal and that the match terms have been calculated from the Vector Cal. The PNA-X receivers are then used to measure and adjust the source power to be accurate at the calibration plane, seen in the following dialog as "Port Power". The Source Power Cal can be performed at a single power level (the lowest level in the specified NVNA measurement sweep plan) or at all the requested powers in the sweep. If Calibrate All Powers is not enabled, and the sweep plan specifies 0 to -20 dbm, then the source will be calibrated at -20 dbm. The source is assumed to be linear over the specified power range. If Calibrate All Powers is enabled, and the sweep plan specifies 0 to

145 dbm, then the source will be calibrated from 0 to -20 dbm. This is useful if a driver amp is added to provide more RF power and has some compression. Note: The intent of the source power cal is to provide the correct power level at the measurement reference plane. If you have removed external components such as an amplifier for the previous calibrations, then you must add them back for the Source Power Cal. To perform a Source Power Cal, click Response, then Cal, then Power Cal, then Source Power Cal Note: Before performing a Source Power Cal, first perform or recall a Full NVNA Cal. This dialog reads the power levels for each from the measurement sweep plan. After you enter Offset values, the NVNA will adjust the internal source power for the measurement to correct for the specified Offset. Note: The internal source power levels are limited by the ALC sweep range. Source attenuation can be added to adjust this range as needed. However, if used, source attenuation changes will cause the previously performed calibration to be invalid. Source Power The power level that comes out of the internal source. Port Power The lowest power levels that are specified in the NVNA measurement sweep plan which will be applied to the DUT at the reference plane. 145

146 Source Offset Enter an offset value to compensate for components in the test setup. Enter positive offset values for gain; negative values for loss. This will adjust the source power, causing the specified "Port Power" to be attained at the calibration plane. (Source Power) +/- (Offset) = Port Power. Accuracy At each data point, power is measured and adjusted until the reading is within this Accuracy Tolerance or the Max Number of Readings has been met. The last power reading is used. Tolerance Sets the maximum desired deviation from the specified Cal Power level in db increments from.001 db to 5 db. Max Number of Readings Sets the maximum number of readings to take at each data point for iterating the source power. Calibration Status One of the following messages is displayed: Calibration exists - Source Power Cal has been successfully performed. No Calibration exists - Source Power Cal has NOT been performed. Out of tolerance! - Source Power Cal failed to meet the tolerance requirement within the specified number of readings. Calibration aborted! - You aborted the Source Power Cal. Calibration failed! - The Source Power Cal failed because of a setup error. Calibration ON Checked - a source power cal exists and it applied. Clear to disable the source power cal. Acquire Power Cal - With the DUT in place, click to measure source power using the PNA-X receivers. This corrects for the match of the DUT. When ON, SrcPwrCal is annotated on the Status Bar. Note By default, the PNA-X sources are in Open Loop mode. In Open Loop mode, the source power is not as accurate, even after performing a source power calibration. For highest source power accuracy, do one of the following to change the source to Open Loop OFF / Internal. In General measurement class, click Response, then Cal, then Power Cal, then Source Power Cal then Open Loop on/off In Multitone and Mixer measurement class, on the Measurement Configuration dialog, Source Configuration tab, select Leveling Mode: Internal. Read PNA-X Help to learn all about a Source Power Cal. Click Back to return to NVNA Help. NVNA Cal Sets 146

147 To start this dialog, click Load Cal Set at the Welcome Cal Wizard page. It can also be started by clicking in the Cal area in the lower-right corner of the NVNA screen. Cal appears when the measurement is calibrated. There are two types of NVNA Cal Sets: 1. Vector Cal Sets - Learn more 2. Full NVNA Cal Sets. These contain all three cals (Vector, Phase, Amplitude). A Full NVNA Cal Set can be recalled when Load Cal Set is clicked at the Welcome Cal Wizard page. Calibration Selection (Manage Full NVNA Cal Sets) dialog box help Allows you to manage and apply Full NVNA Cal Sets. These contain error terms from all three cals (Vector, Phase, Amplitude). Learn about Vector Cal Sets. To apply a Cal Set, click a row to select that Cal Set, then click Apply Cal. A copy of the currently-applied Cal Set is always made and appears here as CurrentCalSet. Turn correction (Cal) OFF by clicking Response, then Cal, then Correction ON/off or by deleting CurrentCalSet. Columns Cal Set Name Name to identify the Cal Set. Measurement Class The class of measurement that was calibrated. Calibrations that were performed for General, Multitone, and Mixer measurement classes can be applied interchangeably providing it covers the same relevant frequencies. Envelope calibrations are NOT compatible with other measurement classes. Ports Port numbers that were calibrated. Cal Date Date and time the Cal Set was last modified. Buttons Copy Invokes the Save as Calset dialog box. Type a name for the copy of the selected Cal Set data. Properties (Or double-click a Cal Set) View all of the Cal Set properties. View Error Terms (Or click Utility then View Error Terms) - Learn more. Delete Permanently deletes the Cal Set after you choose OK to a warning prompt. Although the number of Cal Sets you can have is limited only by the amount of PNA-X memory, it is considered unusual to have more than about 10 existing Cal Sets. Old Cal Sets (with 'stale' data) should be deleted or overwritten. 147

148 Delete All Permanently deletes ALL listed Cal Sets after you choose OK to a warning prompt. Apply Cal Applies the selected Cal Set. If the stimulus settings of the Cal Set and channel are different, the following dialog appears. Close Exit the dialog box. Performs no further action. Full NVNA Cal Set Apply Errors You may see the following error message when you try to apply a Full NVNA Cal Set to the current measurement. This dialog is presented when a Multitone measurement is present and the setup includes frequencies that are not part of the General Domain Cal Set that you tried to load. That Cal Set is not sufficient and cannot applied to the current measurement. Since you had an existing Multitone Cal Set, NVNA offers to merge the Cal Set that you are trying to load with the current Cal Set. This would result in a Cal Set that includes all frequencies from both Cal Sets. Click Yes to accept and Merge. Click NO to clear the currently-loaded Multitone Cal Set and load the General Cal Set. However, the Cal Set can NOT be applied since it does NOT cover all measurement frequencies. You can then continue to load and merge other Cal Sets until all measurement frequencies are covered. As a simple example, if Cal Set 1 covers 1 GHz to 3 GHz, Cal Set 2 covers 3 GHz to -6 GHz but have set up a measurement that covers 1 GHz to 6 GHz, you can load Cal Set 1, then load and merge Cal Set 2 to create a single Cal Set that covers 1 GHz to 6 GHz and can be applied to your current measurement. Vector Cal Sets These contain only the error terms to correct the Vector Cal. These can be recalled ONLY at the second NVNA calibration page. 148

149 Load Cal Set for Vector Calibration dialog box help This dialog box allows you to manage and apply NVNA Vector Cal Sets. Note: Although PNA-X Cal Sets are also listed, they can NOT be applied to NVNA measurements. Although the number of Cal Sets you can have is limited only by the amount of PNA-X memory, it is considered unusual to have more than about 10 existing NVNA Cal Sets.. Old Cal Sets (with 'stale' data) should be deleted or overwritten. To apply a Cal Set, click a row to select that Cal Set, then click OK. If the stimulus settings of the Cal Set and channel are different, or if the Cal Set was created from a different measurement class, an error message appears. Columns Cal Set Name Name to identify the Cal Set. Description User-entered description of the Cal Set GUID (Globally Unique Identifier) ID of the Cal Set. Date Modified Date and time the Cal Set was last modified. Buttons Delete Permanently deletes the Cal Set from the PNA-X after you choose OK to a warning prompt. Delete All Permanently deletes ALL listed Cal Sets after you choose OK to a warning prompt. OK Applies the selected Cal Set. Close Exit the dialog box. Performs no further action. Custom Phase Calibration file format The default file extension for Calibration Standard File is.std. For advanced users. In the unusual situation when a user-supplied phase calibration file is available or when an unsupported phase reference is used to perform a phase calibration, the phase reference data can be loaded from a file. 149

150 There are no headers or special file names or extensions. The data must begin at the first line and be tab-delimited with the following format: Frequency (Hz) Output wave (Re) Output wave (Im) Match (Re) Match (Im) For example: 1.0E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E-03 Data will be interpolated if necessary. Last Modified: 25-Apr Apr Nov May Nov May-2008 Removed 'identical' from on-wafer probes Edited SrcePowerCal per CG Added mixer note for SPC Added SPC notes Updated New topic 150

151 Configure a Power Meter As Receiver The following dialog is used to perform a ONE-TIME a power meter / sensor configuration. This dialog is also used in the PNA to configure a PMAR (Power Meter as Receiver) device. External Device Configuration dialog box help Important Notes By default, an external PMAR device is de-activated when the PNA is Preset or when an Instrument State is recalled. PMAR configuration is NOT saved in an Instrument State file. Therefore, recalling a state file that refers to a device that has been removed, or recalling a state file on a different PNA will result in a Device configuration not found error. External Devices The devices that are currently configured appear in this list. The number of devices that can be configured is limited by the specified Interface. New Click to create a new PMAR configuration. The default name is Device<n>, where <n> is the next number for 'Device'. Remove Click to remove the selected device from the list. Properties Name Enter a device name as it will appear when referring to this device in all dialog boxes. Edit the name at any time. Duplicate names are not allowed. Notes Do NOT name an external device any of the following: primary, receivers, or source, source1, source2 and so forth. 151

152 Do NOT use a parameter name, such as "S11, or "R1". Device Type Select Power Meter. Driver Use AGPM for all Keysight Power Meters. Active Check to make the device available for use in the NVNA. An instrument state that is saved with an Active device (checked) will include the device in the state file. Otherwise, if the Active box is cleared, the device will NOT appear in the state file. Note: Multiple PMAR configurations for the same physical device can be Active and Enabled. Enable I/O Clear this box to disable communication with the selected device. You would do this to configure a device that is not yet connected to the PNA. Communication with devices is attempted when Enable I/O is checked, Active is checked, and OK is pressed. If communication with a device is lost, the affected channels are put into Hold. When communication is attempted, devices with Enable I/O checked are queried for limits for frequency, power, and number of points. If there are limit problems, the PNA sends an error and the affected channels are put into Hold. These limits are enforced by the dialog box in which they are set. Resolve the reported limit problem and then restore the triggering. Communication is also attempted when clicking the Settings button on the Configure Power Sensor dialog. You can not change any of the sensor settings unless Enable I/O and Active are checked and communication is possible with the sensor. Device Properties Click to launch the Configure Power Sensor dialog. IO Configuration Interface Select the interface that is used to connect the device to the PNA. These devices will then appear in the 'Available' field. Choose from: GPIB - Devices connected to the System Controller GPIB port. USB - Devices connected to the PNA USB ports. Aliases - Devices that are connected to ANY interface for which you created an alias. See Configure Alias and LAN devices. LAN - Devices connected to a network using a LAN connection. The PNA must also be connected to the network. Note: Devices connected to LAN must first be configured in Keysight IO libraries before they will appear on the Available list. Available Shows a list of devices that are connected to the specified IO Interface. Refresh Click to rescan the specified interface for devices. Selected Enter the IO configuration or select from the available list of IO Interfaces found. Configure Alias and LAN Devices Use this procedure to configure a device using a LAN interface. Also use for ANY device for which you want to set an alias (easily-recognized) name. The alias name appears in the Available field when Aliases is selected as the Interface. 152

153 1. On the PNA, minimize the PNA application. 2. In the system tray (lower-right corner) right-click the IO icon, then click Keysight Connection Expert To Add a LAN Device: 1. In ACE, click 2. Select Add LAN Instrument (TCPIP0) or USB0, then click OK. 3. Click, then enter the IP address of the external source. 4. Click Test Connection to verify communication. 5. Click OK. To create an Alias for a connected device: 1. In the list of connected instruments, right click the instrument, then Add VISA Alias. 2. Enter the same Device Name that was used to create the power sensor. Power Sensor Configuration dialog box help To launch this dialog, with the PMAR device selected in the External Device Configuration dialog, click Device Properties. Note: By default, a PMAR is de-activated when the PNA is Preset or when a Instrument State is recalled. Sensor For power sensors that are connected to a power meter, select a sensor to configure. Settings Click to launch the Power Sensor Settings dialog. 153

154 When pressed, communication with the sensor is tested. Sensor settings can NOT occur unless Enable I/O is checked on the External Device Configuration dialog, and the sensor is properly connected and configured. Sensor Settling Each power meter reading is "settled" when either: two consecutive meter readings are within this Tolerance value or when the Max Number of Readings has been met. The readings that were taken are averaged together to become the "settled" reading. Tolerance When consecutive power meter readings are within this value of each other, then the reading is considered settled. Max Number of Readings Sets the maximum number of readings the power meter will take to achieve settling. Sensor Loss Compensation Use Loss Table Select this checkbox to apply loss data to Source Power calibration correction (such as for an adapter on the power sensor). Edit Table Invokes the Power Loss Compensation dialog box. Power Sensor Settings dialog box help This dialog appears when you click the Settings button on the Configure Power Sensor dialog. Note: Be sure that the frequency range of your power sensor covers the frequency range of your measurement. This does NOT occur automatically. 154

155 Sensor A (B) Displays one of the following messages depending on type of sensor. Not connected The PNA is not detecting a power sensor. Cal factors are contained within this sensor Internal Reference Cal Factor and Cal Factor data are loaded automatically. The following table settings do not apply. Sensor Data Allows the following entries for power sensor data: Limit Frequency Range Reference Cal Factor Specifies the Cal Factor for the 50 MHz reference signal. Cal Factor Table Specifies the frequency and corresponding Cal Factor for the sensor. Delete Cal Factor Deletes the indicated row in the table. Delete All Deletes all data in the table. To Add a Row to the table, click on a row in the table and press the down arrow on either the PNA front panel or keyboard. A row is added to the bottom of the table. The table is automatically sorted by frequency when OK is pressed. Check to limit the use of the power sensor to those within the Minimum and Maximum frequency values. Clear to use the power sensor for all measurements. If the measurement frequency is not within the Minimum and Maximum frequency values, the closest min or max correction data is used for the measurement. Minimum Frequency Specifies the minimum frequency range for the sensor. Maximum Frequency Specifies the maximum frequency range for the sensor. Zero and Calibrate the Power Sensor For highest accuracy, Zero AND Calibrate the power sensor before measuring data. Follow prompts that may appear. Zero - If the following settings are 'greyed', Internal or External zeroing is selected automatically based on the power meter/sensor model. Otherwise, select the appropriate type of zeroing to perform, then press Zero. Internal Zero - A switch inside the power sensor removes the sensor from the incident power. External Zero - Requires that you physically remove the sensor from incident power. Note for the U2000 Series USB power sensors 155

156 Calibration is NOT available. Select External Zero ONLY when the power to be measured is below the specified level. Otherwise, the U2000 series performs internal zeroing automatically when needed. See your power sensor documentation for more details. U200xA - below -30 dbm U200xH - below -20 dbm U200xB - below 0 dbm If your U2000 power sensor 'hangs' when external zeroing, upgrade the power sensor firmware to Rev. A or higher to fix this problem. Calibrate - Available when the selected sensor has calibration capability. Calibration involves measuring an internal 1 mw source. Keysight P-Series sensors have an internal reference so you can calibrate them without connecting to the meter s reference port. Keysight U2000 USB power sensors do not require calibrating. For other sensors, refer to the documentation to determine if it has calibration capability. Press Calibrate, then follow the prompts. Power Loss Compensation dialog box help To Add a Row to the table, click on a row in the table and press the down arrow on either the PNA front panel or keyboard. To Edit a value, double-click in the cell to be edited. Compensates for losses that occur when using an adapter or coupler to connect the power sensor to the measurement port. These components will be removed when the calibration is complete. The Frequency / Loss pairs define the amount of loss for the entire frequency range. For example, using the entries in the above dialog image: 0.5 db is used to compensate power sensor measurements up to 1 GHz. Each data point between 1 GHz to 2 GHz is linearly interpolated between 0.5 db and 1 db. 156

157 1 db is used above 2 GHz. A single frequency/loss segment is applied to the entire frequency range. Beginning with A.09.80, enter up to 9999 segments to achieve greater accuracy. Previously the limit was 100. Note: Large segment counts with one or more power sensors can result in long load and close times for the PNA Application. Frequency Enter a frequency in Hz. Loss Enter a loss as a POSITIVE value in db. To compensate for gain, use NEGATIVE values. Delete Table Segment Deletes row indicated in the field. Delete All Deletes all data in the table. The Power Loss Compensation table survives PNA Preset and Power OFF. To NOT use Loss compensation, clear the Use Loss table checkbox on the Configure Power Sensor dialog. Last Modified: 11-Dec-2012 New topic in NVNA 157

158 Fixture De-embedding Fixture De-embedding mathematically removes the effects of a 2-port device (a test fixture or adapter) from either the calibration process or from NVNA measurements. The adapters or fixturing must first be characterized in an S2P file. This can be done by measuring the S-parameters of the device and saving the results to an S2P file. This can also be done from S11 measurements using the PNA Characterize Adaptor Macro. (Link goes to PNA Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) See Calibration De-embed to de-embed an adapter that is used with the Phase Reference or Power Meter. To launch the Measurement Deembed dialog: Click Response, then Cal, then Fixturing, then 2-port De-embedding, then Setup Measurement De-embedding dialog box help This Measurement De-embedding dialog is used to remove the effects of a fixture that is NOT in place during a calibration. Fixture de-embedding, in effect, moves the reference plane for both amplitude and phase at all measured frequencies, including measured harmonics. 1. Click the Port <n> File button, then select the S2P file to De-embed. The selected file appears below the button. 2. Check Enable to perform de-embedding for that port. 3. Check Enable De-embedding (All Ports) to perform de-embedding. Available only when a calibration Measurement De-embedding Files These two selections are used ONLY to de-embed a fixture during the measurement that was NOT in place during calibration. These may be selected before or after the calibration and may be Enabled or Disabled from the 2-Port De-embedding menu. When 2-Port de-embedding is enabled or disabled, any existing measurement data will be cleared and a new measurement must be performed. Port 1 File - Fixture A in the image below. The fixture or adapter is connected to PNA-X Port 1 and DUT input. 158

159 Port 2 File - Fixture B in the image below. The fixture or adapter is connected to PNA-X Port 2 and DUT output. Reverse adapter ports This image shows the measurement fixtures (fixture A and B). All adapters to be deembedded are shown in the default orientation. If port 1 of the S2P file was NOT characterized as shown in the above image, check Reverse adapter ports, and the adapter file is reversed, with Port 2 being connected to the PNA. Absolute Calibration De-embedding Files To launch the Calibration De-embedding dialog: Click Response, then Cal, then Fixturing, then Calibration De-embedding, then Setup From the same menu, you can choose to: Interpolate the S2P file if the number of data points that are read is different from the current NVNA data points (step size) setting. Enable and Disable Calibration De-embedding. Absolute Calibration 2-Port De-embedding dialog box help Click the relevant button, then select the S2P file to De-embed. The selected file appears below the appropriate button. These two selections are used ONLY to de-embed the effects of an adapter that is used ONLY to connect the Phase Reference and Power Sensor during calibration. These must be selected here before the calibration. 159

160 Phase Ref Adapter File: The adapter is used to connect the Phase Reference to the Calibration reference plane. Power Mtr Adapter File: The adapter is used to connect the Power Meter to the Calibration reference plane. This image shows the calibration adapter in the default orientation. Port 1 of the fixture (S2P file) is assumed to be connected to the PNA-X or test port cable. Port 2 of the fixture (S2P file) is assumed to be connected to the DUT, Phase Ref, or Power Meter. Reverse adapter ports If port 1 of the S2P file was NOT characterized as shown in the above image, check Reverse adapter ports, and the adapter file is reversed, with Port 2 being connected to the PNA. Last Modified: 20-Jan Feb May-2008 Updated dialogs Separated into two dialogs New topic 160

161 Display Menu To access all of the Display menu items: Click Response then Display. Many of the Display menu selections are also available when right-clicking on a window. In this topic: Display, Windows menu Display Items Title Bars Status Bar Display, Windows menu Click Response then Display then Windows to access the following menu items: You can display several NVNA measurement windows simultaneously. However, all windows MUST contain measurements from the same Measurement Class. Most of the Windows menu selections follow the standard Windows conventions except for the following: 1. Close Active Window / Close All But Active - The Active window has a red border. 2. The Measurement Configuration dialog is always displayed or hidden in a window. Therefore, although it may have been closed, Tile All will always include a Measurement Configuration window. Tile Data Display Windows will tile ONLY the windows containing data - NOT the Measurement Configuration window. Display Items With a trace display present: Click Response then Display then Display Items to access the following menu items: 161

162 Trace Status - Display or hide the following annotation in the Active window. Marker Readout - Display or hide the Marker Readout in the Active window. Learn more about markers. Title Bars Display or hide the title bars from all windows. Status Bar Display or hide the status bar at the bottom of the NVNA window. Me asu rem ent Cla ss Port Nu mbe rs for the mea s. (3 port s/ num bers 1,3, and 4) F - Re cei ver Ga tin g en abl ed. P - So urc e mo dul ati on en abl ed. Trig geri ng / Ave ragi ng is ena ble d X- Para mete rs or S- Para mete rs are enab led. Measur ement time Phase Refere nce Source Sw ept Va ria ble s are co nfi gur ed. Exte rnal Instr ume nts are confi gure d. Deem bed din g is ena ble d. A So urc e Po we r Cal is en abl ed. Cal Cor rect ion Last Modified: 4-Aug-2010 New topic 162

163 Group Delay Note: This topic, taken from the PNA Help file, discusses Group Delay as a function of frequency as measured on the PNA. Group delay is a measure of phase distortion. Group delay is the actual transit time of a signal through a device under test as a function of frequency. When specifying group delay, it is important to specify the aperture used for the measurement. What is Group Delay? Group Delay versus Deviation from Linear Phase What Is Aperture? Accuracy Considerations How to Measure Group Delay What Is Group Delay? Group delay is: A measure of device phase distortion. The transit time of a signal through a device versus frequency. The derivative of the device's phase characteristic with respect to frequency. Refer to the graphic below for the following discussion: The phase characteristic of a device typically consists of both linear and higher order (deviations from linear) phase-shift components. Linear phase-shift component: Higher-order phase-shift component: Represents average signal transit time. Attributed to electrical length of test device. Represents variations in transit time for different frequencies. Source of signal distortion. Refer to the graphic below for the following discussion: 163

164 In a group delay measurement: The linear phase shift component is converted to a constant value (representing the average delay). The higher order phase shift component is transformed into deviations from constant group delay (or group delay ripple). The deviations in group delay cause signal distortion, just as deviations from linear phase cause distortion. The measurement trace depicts the amount of time it takes for each frequency to travel through the device under test. Refer to the following equation for this discussion on how the PNA-X computes group delay: Phase data is used to find the phase change (-d ). A specified frequency aperture is used to find the frequency change (d ). Using the two values above, an approximation is calculated for the rate of change of phase with frequency. This approximation represents group delay in seconds (assuming linear phase change over the specified frequency aperture). Group Delay versus Deviation from Linear Phase Group delay is often a more accurate indication of phase distortion than Deviation from Linear Phase. 164

165 Deviation from linear phase results are shown in the upper region of the following graphic: Device 1 and device 2 have the same value, despite different appearances. Group Delay results are shown in the lower region: Device 1 and device 2 have different values of group delay. This is because in determining group delay, the analyzer calculates slope of phase ripple, which is dependent on number of ripples which occur per unit of frequency. What Is Aperture? During a group delay measurement, the PNA-X measures the phase at two closely spaced frequencies and then computes the phase slope. The frequency interval (frequency delta) between the two phase measurement points is called the aperture. Changing the aperture can result in different values of group delay. The computed slope ( -delta phase / delta frequency) varies as the aperture is increased. This is why when you are comparing group delay data, you must know the aperture that was used to make the measurements. Refer to the graphic below for the following discussion: Narrow aperture: Wide aperture: 165

166 Provides more detail in phase linearity. Makes measurement susceptible to noise (smaller signal-to-noise ratio) and PNA-X phase detector resolution. Provides less detail in phase linearity because some phase response averaged-out or not measured. Makes measurement less susceptible to noise (larger signal-to-noise ratio). Group Delay Aperture dialog box help Although the Group Delay Aperture is defined as the difference in frequency between two data points (see What Is Aperture?), the group delay calculation can be averaged over many adjacent data points, similar to the PNA-X smoothing feature. The number of adjacent data points can be set using any of the following methods: Points Number of adjacent data points to average. Default setting is 11 points. Choose a value between 2 and the current number of points in the channel. Percent of Span The data points within this percentage of the current frequency span are averaged. Choose a value between (2 points / current number of points) and 100 percent. The span must contain at least two data points. Frequency The data points within this frequency range are averaged. The frequency range must contain at least two data points. When the frequency span or number of points is reduced so that the current Group Delay Aperture is NOT attainable, the Aperture is adjusted to the new frequency span or number of points. OK Applies setting changes and closes the dialog box. Cancel Closes the dialog. Setting changes are NOT applied. Accuracy Considerations It is important to keep the phase difference between two adjacent measurement points less than 180 (see the following graphic). Otherwise, incorrect phase and delay information may result. Undersampling may occur when measuring devices with long electrical length. You can verify that the phase difference measured between two adjacent points is less than 180 by adjusting the following settings until the measurement trace no longer changes: Increase the number of points 166

167 Narrow the frequency span Electrical delay may also be used to compensate for this effect. The frequency response is the dominant error in a group delay test setup. Performing a thruresponse measurement calibration significantly reduces this error. For greater accuracy, perform a 2-port measurement calibration. Particularly for an amplifier, the response may vary differently at various temperatures. The tests should be done when the amplifier is at the desired operating temperature. How to Measure Group Delay (using the PNA) 1. Preset the analyzer. 2. If your DUT is an amplifier, it may be necessary to adjust the PNA-X source power: o o Set the source power to be in the linear region of the amplifier's output response, typically 10 db below the 1 db compression point. If needed, use an external attenuator so the amplifier output power will be sufficiently attenuated to avoid causing receiver compression or damage to the PNA-X port Connect the DUT as shown in the following graphic. 4. Select an S21 measurement. 5. Select the settings for your DUT: 167

168 o o o o frequency range number of measurement points. format: delay scale: autoscale 6. Remove the DUT and perform a measurement calibration. 7. Reconnect the DUT. 8. Scale the displayed measurement for optimum viewing. 9. Use the Group Delay Aperture setting to increase the aperture, reducing noise on the trace while maintaining meaningful detail. 10. Use the markers to measure group delay (expressed in seconds) at a particular frequency of interest. 11. Print the data or save it to a disk. Last Modified: 27-Jun-2011 New topic from PNA 168

169 Scale To start the following dialog: Click Response then Scale or Right-click on any measurement window Scale dialog box help Scale Per Division Sets the value of the Y-axis divisions of the measurement plot Autoscale - Automatically sets value of the Y-axis divisions and reference value to fit the traces within the grid area of the screen. The stimulus values and reference position are not affected. The NVNA determines the smallest possible scale factor that will allow all the displayed data to fit onto 80 percent of the vertical grid. The reference level is chosen to center the trace on the screen. Reference Level Sets the value of the reference line. Range: -500 db to 500 db. Position In rectangular formats, sets the position of the reference line. Zero is the bottom line of the screen and ten is the top line. Default position is five (middle). Autoscale when display data set changes 169

170 Receiver Attenuation Click Response, then Receiver Attenuation. or Click Stimulus, then Source Attenuators, then Receiver Attenuators. Receiver Attenuation dialog box help Set the Attenuation at the specified test port receiver. Learn more about receiver attenuation. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Modifying the test port attenuator values will invalidate the calibration. Receiver attenuation is usually selected to avoid overpowering the PNA-X receiver. The receivers start to compress at about +10 dbm. However, spurious receiver harmonics may become evident between -10 dbm and -20 dbm at the receiver input ports. Therefore, it is recommended that for optimum nonlinear measurement performance, the maximum power at the receiver input should be between -10 dbm and -20 dbm. Test port 1 = Receiver A Test port 2 = Receiver B Test port 3 = Receiver C Test port 4 = Receiver D Turn Off Measurement Port Powers Click Stimulus, then Turn Off Measurement Port Powers. This will immediately turn off all power at all test ports. It will not affect phase reference source power or any external sources. 170

171 Last Modified: 12-May-2017 New topic 171

172 Receiver Path To access this dialog: Click Response, then Receiver Path Receiver Path dialog box help Select the path to use for ALL receivers. Wideband Path is used for Wideband Pulse measurements Narrowband Path has better receiver linearity. This is selected automatically when in the envelope tab. This setting is Switch#2 on the block diagram for all PNA-X Receivers. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) 172

173 Port-1 Reference Mixer Click Response, then Port 1 Reference Mixer Switch Port 1 Reference Mixer Switch dialog box help Select the path to use for the R1 receiver in general domain measurements. Internal Path is used to bypass the front panel jumper. This allows general domain measurements to be made while configured in envelope domain mode (Source Out Ref 1 connected to Receiver D input by a cable on the front panel), but does not allow use of an external coupler for a1. External Path allows direct access to the R1 receiver from the front panel, enabling use of external couplers if desired. In this mode, switching between general domain and envelope domain measurements requires physical changes to front panel cables/jumpers. This setting is the Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch on the Path Configuration dialog in the PNA-X firmware. Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch Click Response, then Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch Port 1 Noise Tuner Switch dialog box help Noise Figure measurements are NOT allowed in the NVNA. This dialog is provided as a convenience for PNA Noise Figure customers to allow the Tuner to be connected while making NVNA measurements. The Noise Tuner Switch dialog shows different settings depending on your PNA model and Noise Figure option GHz and below (Opt N524xA/S93029A - N524xB) and 50 GHz (Opt H29) 173

174 Internal - Use for NVNA measurements. External - Designed to route source power through an external component (or Tuner) that is connected to the front-panel. In the following image of the Noise Path Configuration dialog in the 26.5 GHz PNA-X, the orange line between CPLR THRU and SRC OUT represents the Noise Tuner (ECal module). 50 GHz (Opt 029 N524xA/S93029A - N524xB) Tuner Path - Not Available. Bypass Path - Use for NVNA measurements. 174

175 175

176 Phase Normalization Click Response, then Phase Normalization then Enable When enabled, Phase Normalization causes the selected fundamental wave (A1 wave and so forth) to cross the Y axis at zero, and all the other waves to be displayed relative to the selected wave. By default, all the waves are normalized to the input fundamental frequency (A1 wave) when phase normalization is enabled. Also, they can be normalized to the output fundamental frequency (B2 wave), or A2, B1 wave. Phase Offset Click Response, then Phase Normalization then Phase Offset Select Phase Offset to assign an arbitrary phase offset (-180 to 180 ) to the fundamental wave to specify the phase at the zero crossing point. 176

177 Couple Segments NOT available in Envelope Measurement Class. Click Response, then Couple Segments When checked / enabled, Couple Segments causes all segments to be combined into a single sweep. Power settings are disabled. There are three primary measurement setups when Couple Segments is enabled: Calibration Verification When S-parameters are enabled, Couple Segments can be used for small-signal calibration verification. An S-parameter sweep is performed that includes each frequency in the measurement setup. Multi-tone measurement using external stimulus When S-parameters are disabled, multitone measurements are enabled by default. In this mode, an external multitone stimulus may be applied at the PNA-X rear-panel J10 input. GPIB Instrument Configuration may be used to control the external sources. Note: The new Multitone measurement class greatly simplifies external source control and multitone measurement setup, and enables more complex measurements including two-tone X- parameters. Oscilloscope emulation mode Alternatively, the instrument may function similarly to an equivalent-time oscilloscope by connecting a DUT to either test port, performing a measurement, and viewing it in the time domain. The DUT must either generate a stimulus or be driven by an external stimulus. In each of these modes, care must be taken to ensure that all frequencies of interest are included in the measurement setup. If there is significant energy content in a frequency that is not measured, the results will not be accurate. When using external stimulus, all sources must be connected to the 10 MHz Reference on the back panel of the PNA. Last Modified: 9-Nov Feb Jul Apr-2008 Couple Segments not allowed in Env. Added Phase Offset Added Port1 Ref Mixer New topic 177

178 178

179 Customize Parameters To launch the following dialog: Click Response, then Measure, then Waves, then Ratios, Currents. Customize Parameters dialog box help Ratio A/B Display the ratios of the A and B receivers. Ratio V/I Display the Voltage (V) or Current (I) ratios of the A and B receivers. X-Y Axis Display time-domain port voltage or current on the X and Y axis. Choose input or output voltage to input or output current. To view the Dynamic Load Line, choose output voltage to output current. Check Activate, then select a parameter for the Numerator, then a parameter or value for the Denominator. See Overview for a discussion of Voltage / Current waves. 179

180 Setup 2-Port Cal for 1-Port Measurements The following procedure shows the steps for setting up a 2-port calibration and downgrading to a 1-port calibration to allow this calibration to work with 1-port measurements. There are cases where this can be beneficial when using external test sets and de-embedding of attenuators during the phase calibration. This process only applies when using standard CW 2 port setups. It does not apply to pulse or high isolation 2 port measurement configurations. Additionally, it requires a current (accurate) IFmuxcal file. This can be generated from the PNA-X service routine. The internal RF path is changed between a 1-port and 2-port measurement. The IFmuxcal file compensates for this internal path change. To generate the IFmuxcal select Utility, Service, Adjustments, then IF_Response Adjustment in the PNA-X. Now close the PNA-X firmware and launch the NVNA firmware. The NVNA measurement setup and calibration process utilizes two files: <filename>.ncm - State file, NVNA calset, and data <filename>.ncs - NVNA calset 180

181 In this topic: Configuring 2-Port Cal to 1-Port Cal Using the Interface Configuring 2-Port to 1-Port Cal Using Remote Commands Configuring 2-Port Cal to 1-Port Cal Using the Interface 1. Set up a 2-port state as described in Measurement Configuration. 2. Select Response then Calibration Wizard and perform a 2-port calibration as described in NVNA Calibration. After the phase calibration, receiver amplitude calibration and vector calibration has been done, ensure that the full NVNA 2- port calibration is saved as a NVNA calset file (*.ncs) on the final page of the calibration wizard. 181

182 3. Click on the Next button then click on the Save As NVNA CalSet button to save the NVNA calset. 4. Set up or recall a 1-port state using the same setup parameters as the 2-port state set up in Step 1. The default is a 2-port state. Therefore, if not recalling a 1-port state, to set up a 1-port state select Utility, Number of Ports, then

183 5. Click on the Apply button. The following message should appear. 6. Start the Calibration Wizard by selecting Response then Calibration Wizard. 7. In the first page of the Calibration Wizard, click on the Load NVNA Calset button to access the NVNA Calibration Selection dialog. 183

184 8. Select the 2-port NVNA calset from Step 2 then click on the Apply Cal button. 9. The 1-port measurement state will now have a full 1 port calibration. This complete file can now be saved as a.ncm file if desired. 10. Perform the 1-port measurements. Configuring 2-Port Cal to 1-Port Cal Using Remote Commands After setting up a standard 2-port state and performing a 2-port calibration, the Save and Recall commands are used to downgrade to 1-port measurements. 1. Set up a 2-port state and a 2-port calibration. 2. Save the state file and NVNA calset (*.ncs) using the Save command. The calibration state is saved. 3. If desired, save the state file, data, and NVNA calset (*.ncm) using the Save command. The measurement, data, and calibration state is saved. 4. Set up a 1-port state using the same setup parameters as the 2-port state set up in Step Recall the 2-port NVNA calset using the Recall command. 6. The 1-port measurement state will now have a full 1 port calibration. This complete file can now be saved as a.ncm file if desired. 7. Perform the 1-port measurements. 184

185 Load Control Measurements 185

186 Load Pull Options Keysight offers the following TWO options for performing Load Pull measurements with NVNA: Option 520 (N524xA) S94520A (N524xB): Load Control using Maury ATS Software and Maury Tuners - Full-featured application provided by Maury Microwave. Set the compatibility Preference for Maury ATS software. This preference should be unchecked when not running Maury ATS software. Option 521 (N524xA) S94521A (N524xB): Load Control using Keysight Arbitrary Load Control Software, and Maury Tuners - Simplified integrated application: active, Maury passive tuners or hybrid. In this topic: Why Perform Load Control Measurements? Three Methods to Perform Load Control Passive Load Control Active Load Control Hybrid Load Control Why Perform Load Control Measurements? NVNA enables automated measurement of X-parameters at a large signal operating point consisting of a single large tone at port 1. This means that the fundamental input tone at port 1 is treated as a large signal, and all other tones, such as source harmonics or reflections from mismatched loads, are treated as small signals. Although this approach is sufficient for a large class of components, the small signal assumption may lead to errors in the case of some components that operate at high compression levels under highly mismatched conditions. With NVNA and an arbitrary load, X-parameters can also be measured in highly mismatched conditions. This can be useful for high-power, multi-stage amplifiers, and bare transistors that are far from a 50-ohm impedance. Load-dependent X-parameters includes magnitude and phase of all harmonics as functions of power, device bias, and load impedances. Data can be immediately used in a nonlinear simulator as a large signal model for complex microwave circuit analysis and design. Load-Dependent X-Parameters of a FET 186

187 Measurements X-parameter Simulation Three Methods to Perform Load Control Passive Load Control Active Load Control Hybrid Load Control Passive Load Control using a Tuner 187

188 To vary Magnitude, move the probe vertically. To vary Phase, move the probe horizontally. Limitations of Passive Tuners The loss in cabling, external couplers, and possibly a probe between the DUT and the tuner degrades the maximum achievable gamma value as shown below in the shaded region: 188

189 Active Load Control An RF Source is used as the active load and is connected to the DUT output. The source injects a calculated magnitude and phase vector to simulate a very specific load to the device. The reflection is measured. Gamma = A2/B2 189

190 Hybrid Load Control The passive tuner is used to get the reflection close to the desired gamma. Then the active source can fine-tune to the desired gamma. In this way, a lower-power amplifier can be used to achieve the full reflection. 190

191 ALC Instrument Configuration Before performing Active Load Control measurements, the following instruments MUST be configured. Tuner Configuration (for Passive Load Control & Hybrid) Tuner Characterization (for Passive Source & Load Control and Hybrid) External Source (for Active Load & Hybrid) SMU (DC) Configuration (as needed) Physical Setup of the External Couplers Power Budget for NVNA Load Pull System For instruments which are not pre-defined in the GUI, see the generic NVNA Instrument Control dialog help page. The Generic interface control is also used to enhance pre-defined instrument code by using the Advanced mode to add additional code to the Basic code generated. To access the Instrument Control dialog: Click Utility, then External Instruments, then Instrument Control. Instrument Control dialog box help Click Add Instrument to add new instruments. To edit an existing instrument, select an instrument, then click Edit Instrument. Tuner Configuration dialog box help 191

192 Name - Enter a easily recognizable name for the tuner. The best practice is to use the name Load tuner if the tuner is used for the Load side of the DUT and Source if the tuner is used for the Source side. Orientation - Choose from Source (input) or Load (output) Coupler Configuration - Choose from: Couplers are placed in front of the tuner (Coupler is placed between the DUT and the Tuner). Couplers are placed behind the tuner (Tuner is placed between the DUT and the Coupler). The Effects of Coupler Placement 192

193 The placement of the couplers balances the need to have the receivers close to the DUT versus the need to have the least amount of loss between the tuners and the DUT. See the effects of coupler loss on the measurements. Coupler Placement IN FRONT of the Tuners (closest to the DUT). This is the Default choice and recommended. Because the receivers are closest to the DUT, reflected measurements are most accurate. However, reflected power at the tuner is lowest because of the loss through the couplers. Use this method if you can achieve an acceptable amount of reflected power at the tuners. This is best done using the Hybrid load pull method to overcome the losses. Important: Note that the Maximum input power level that can be measured with the PNA receivers in the NVNA mode and in the Direct Receiver Access (DRA configuration) is (Minus 20 dbm) -20 dbm. This value is the receiver s linear operating range (before compression). So the attenuation level for the receiver input MUST be carefully calculated and selected so that the input power level going into the receiver DO NOT exceed the -20 dbm value. Learn more (Link to the power budget). Coupler Placement BEHIND the Tuners (farthest from the DUT). Use this method if you can NOT achieve an acceptable amount of reflected power at the tuners. This method is potentially less accurate. That is, when the tuner state is changed, the S-parameters of the delta states are de-embedded to maintain calibration. Inaccuracies in the calibrated tuner S-parameters can degrade measurement accuracy. Tuner Driver USB - Tuner connects to USB ONLY. 193

194 LXI/USB - Tuner connects to LAN or USB TCPIP - Tuner connects to LAN ONLY. The tuner is detected after this selection. If it is not detected, navigate to, then select the driver. File Locations Front Block - An S2P file describing any fixturing to be de-embedded in the tuner calibration. See PNAHelp to learn how to characterize a fixture. Tuner Characterization - Loads a *.tun file that results from a Tuner calibration. Learn how to perform a tuner calibration. Tuner Termination File - In order to set the gamma correctly, the ALC must have a characterization of the reflections from the Tuner output and all of the components back to the PNA test port to which it is connected. Learn how to measure the Tuner termination. External Source dialog box help Name - Add a descriptive name for the source. Driver - Select the external source model, or choose AGGeneric for sources that are not listed. Power Offset Specify the power offset value in db. Note: The power offset value could be used when performing high power amplifier measurement. In this case an external driver amplifier can be added at the input and output of the device. The Power offset value represent the Power Gain value of the driver amplifier. 194

195 Pulse Mode Enable or disable the pulse mode for the external source IO Configuration - Select from a list of external instrument addresses that are connected to the PNA. Click Advanced to add SCPI commands which can extend source configuration capability. SMU Configuration dialog box help Properties Name - Add a descriptive name for the SMU. Model - Select the SMU family. Choose from N67XX, B29XX, or other families. To control SMU models other than these, click Advanced Mode. Then you can send your ordered list of SCPI commands to the SMU. IO Configuration - Select from a list of external instrument addresses that are connected to the PNA. Instrument Settings For each Channel (or module) to be measured: Enable - Check to use the specified SMU for that measurement. Source Type - Choose either Voltage or Current source. Source Level Setup - Choose from the following: Fixed Value - The SMU will be set to the same value for every data point. Variable - The SMU can be set to a different value for each data point. 195

196 Source Level - For Fixed values, choose a constant voltage or current level. For Variable bias values, select a voltage or current variable name. Important - Variable names are chosen deliberately for NVNA and associated modeling programs. VDC = voltage source _1 = bias is associated with input port 1 _2 = bias is associated with output port 2 _3 = bias is associated with input port 3 _4 = bias is associated with output port 4 To be included in the saved X-parameters (*.mdif) file, ALL bias channels (including FIXED) MUST be defined as a variable. Then define the value as fixed in the Swept Variable dialog. Reverse Output - Enabling the reverse output on an SMU channel allow to multiply the variable value, configured in the variable configuration, by minus one (-1 x var). It is important to know that enabling the reverse output do not reverse the physical bias value and you must swap the physical polarity on the SMU side in order to have a physical negative bias to drive the DUT. You can use this feature if you are using an SMU that cannot provide and accept a negative voltage/current value. Note: Enabling the Reverse Output Limit - The Source will be limited to this value for the measurement. Measured Variable - A pre-configured variable is assigned. The bias on some DUTs must be turned ON in a specific sequence and react differently when a delay is allowed between these settings. For example, on some FETs, the Drain voltage must be set BEFORE a Gate voltage. The following FOUR settings control the sequence and timing when providing bias to the DUT. For more information: See DC Bias Timing Example (below) Refer to your SMU documentation. See the N67xx app note: Properly Powering ON and Off Multiple Power Inputs 196

197 Offset Delay - Sets a delay to allow the DC source to settle before and after making other DC settings or measurements. Safe Mode - Choose from the following: None - No sequence or delay. All bias values are set simultaneously. Point - Delay and Safe State settings occur after each data point. Sweep - Delay and Safe State settings occur after each sweep. Safe Value - Sets the value to which the channel will be set for the specified Safe Mode. Turn off after measurement - Check to turn the SMU off after each measurement. Clear (uncheck) to leave the SMU on between measurements. Do this for DC supply lines. Swept Variables - Starts the Variable Configuration dialog. Learn more. Generic Mode - Starts the following dialog. As a result, all communications with this instrument will be viewable and edited as SCPI commands using the Instrument Configuration dialog. Learn more. DC Bias Timing Examples Example 1 shows how to configure the ALC application to achieve the following DC Bias Timing for a FET: Channel 1 - Input Bias (Gate voltage) 197

198 Note: These values will be inverted when applied to the DUT. The polarity was swapped at the SMU because the module did not support a negative supply. Settings: Reverse Output = true, Offset Delay = 0; Safe Mode = None; Turn off after measurement = True Channel 2 - Output Bias (Drain voltage) Note: These values are NEGATIVE when applied to the DUT. Settings: Offset Delay =100 msec; Safe Mode = Sweep; Safe Value= 500 mv; Time at safe level = 100 msec; Turn off after measurement = True, Reverse Output = false 1. The Gate immediately steps to -3 V. 2. After the specified Drain Offset Delay of 100 msec, the Drain voltage steps to +1 V, then to +2 V, then to the specified Sweep Safe Mode voltage of +500 mv. Safe mode is applied after each sweep sequence. (Maybe we should talk about this section) 3. It waits for the specified 100 msec 'at safe level'. 4. The Gate voltage steps to -2 V and the Drain voltage steps again to 1 V, then to 2 V. 5. At the end of the measurement, the Drain voltage goes OFF. If the "Turn off after measurement" box was cleared, the Drain voltage would be set to the Safe level of 500 mv. 6. After the specified Drain Offset Delay (100 msec), the Gate voltage goes to OFF. How to achieve this timing In the Instrument Control dialog, make the following settings. Click Swept Variables. Then for each variable, set the following voltage levels: 198

199 Example 2 The following example shows exactly the same variable and voltage setup as example 1, except for the following: Safe Mode = Point for both variables. Offset Delay = 0 for both variables. 199

200 1. The Gate immediately steps to -3 V. 2. The Drain voltage immediately steps to 1 V, then drops to the specified Point Safe Mode voltage of 500 mv. 3. After the specified 100 msec 'at safe level', the Drain voltage steps to +2 V. 4. The Gate and Drain voltages both drop to the specified Point Safe Mode voltage of -500 mv. 5. The Drain voltage steps to 3 V and the Gate voltage steps again to 1 V. 6. The Gate voltage then drops to the specified Point Safe Mode voltage of -500 mv and waits for the specified 100 msec 'at safe level'. 7. The Gate voltage steps to -2 V. 8. At the end of the measurement, the Gate and Drain voltages goes OFF. If the "Turn off after measurement" boxes were cleared, both voltages would be set to the Safe level of 500 mv. Physical Setup of the External Couplers It is impossible to show all of the possible setups for couplers, tuners, and other external devices that may be used in a Load Pull configuration. The following examples assume X- parameter extraction is also being performed which uses the PNA internal second source. Typical Passive Setup 200

201 Typical Hybrid Setup All components shown in the above diagrams are EXTERNAL except the PNA receivers. The PNA receivers (R1, R3, A, and C shown above) are accessed by removing the frontpanel loops. Connect the attenuator output to the receiver input connector. The Port 1 loops RCVR A IN (top) RCVR R1 IN (bottom). 201

202 R1 measures the signal going into the DUT input. R3 measures the signal going into the DUT output. A measures the signal reflected off the DUT input. C measures the signal out of the DUT and reflected off the DUT output. Power Budget for NVNA Load Pull System Below is an EXAMPLE of a typical power budget for a Hybrid Load Pull System using the PNA port 3 as the active source. Legend / Abbreviations DT - Primary source power ET - Extraction Tone power CF - Coupling factor F - Frequency Pmax = Maximum power capability Pout = expected output power Considerations: When using the NVNA application (different from the PNA software), the maximum power level that can be measured with the PNA receivers with little distortion (compression) is approximately -(minus) 20 dbm. Do not exceed the power handling capability of the external components or the DUT. 202

203 The maximum power into the PNA test ports is printed on the PNA front-panel. 203

204 Load Pull using ALC Software and Maury Tuners Arbitrary Load Control software can be performed using Maury Tuner's, an Active RF Source, or both. In this topic: Limitations and Requirements Overview Measurement Concept Typical Process Flow How to Start ALC Measure DC softkey Setup tab Measure tab Select tab Measure Load softkey Mode tab Stimulus Setup tab Search tab Load Grid tab Plot Contours tab Display softkey Frequency Domain tab Time Domain tab Power Parameters tab Extract Model softkey Utility softkey See Also Tuner Gamma Verification Tuner Characterization Park Tuner Cascade S2P Files Reverse S2P File ALC Verification Load Control Instrument Configuration 204

205 Physical Setup for ALC Power Budget for NVNA Load Pull System Limitations Arbitrary Load Control does NOT contain the following features which are found in the Maury ATS software: Arbitrary Load Control has been designed to extract the X-parameter model under varying load conditions. While it has many of the attributes of a load pull system, it is NOT a generic load-pull system. The following are not included in the NVNA Arbitrary Load Control application General Model extraction and fitting. Complex data analysis and display Multi-harmonic Load Pull Source Pull High-power I/V Open driver framework Modulated waveform signals Eye diagrams, EVM, etc Noise Parameters Requirements For Passive or Hybrid methods, one (output tuner) is required. While it is not recommended for stability issues, optionally use an input tuner to pre-match the source to the maximum power transfer. Phase Reference used for making NVNA phase measurements. Learn more. External Couplers are usually required to route signals directly to the PNA receivers, bypassing the internal couplers. The couplers can be connected BEFORE or AFTER the Tuners. Learn more. HIGHLY recommended.- External monitor connected to the PNA in extended display mode. Learn how in the PNA Help file (this link requires an internet connection). Overview Measurement Concepts A traditional Network Analyzer can be used to characterize linear devices and presents approximate 50 ohm impedances to the DUT at the test ports. The standard NVNA can characterize non-linear devices over varying impedances from about 25 to 100 ohm. The goal of ALC is to measure and model the X-parameters of a DUT under an arbitrary set of load conditions. This can be done far from 50 ohms or even for Gamma greater than 1. This is done by using active, passive, or hybrid terminations at the DUT output. The ALC application controls those terminations and presents the measured data to validate that 205

206 the presented stimulus and terminations cover the desired range of excitation for using the X-parameter model in simulation. ALC stimulates the DUT at specified fundamental frequencies ONLY. You can choose to measure and display the harmonic responses of those frequencies as well. An input tuner can be used to match the input impedance of the DUT in order to deliver maximum power transfer. However, this is not recommended due to potential stability issues. Learn more ALC concepts at Load Pull Options. About the ALC Application The ALC software is installed with NVNA. It controls the NVNA software and external instruments and presents the Load Control measurement results on the Display softkey. Although the ALC application can be minimized to show the NVNA software making measurements, this should be unnecessary under normal conditions. When ALC starts, it reads the current NVNA measurement settings. If you make further NVNA settings with ALC open, be sure to click Refresh on the ALC Utility dialog to again read the NVNA measurement settings. You can also Save and Recall the ALC settings on the ALC Utility dialog. Important: To completely recall an ALC setup, first recall an NVNA (*.ncm) setup file, then recall an ALC (*.lps) setup file. Typical Process Flow The ALC measurement process is NOT linear, but iterative, much like making VNA measurements. Therefore, the following is a general overview of the process to be followed to perform ALC measurements. 1. Setup the measurement (frequency points, power, etc.) in the NVNA application. If a passive tuner is used, this is known as a GRID. Desired measurements CAN be performed between calibrated Gamma points by interpolation, but NOT between frequency points. Therefore, choose a sufficient number of frequency points to accurately characterize the impedance of your DUT under arbitrary load conditions. Of course, once the model has been extracted, interpolation can be performed in simulation between any variable. Caution must be exercised, as interpolating nonlinear data can lead to inaccuracies. 2. If a passive tuner is used, perform a Tuner Characterization, if the tuner has not been already characterized over the requested measurement range. Learn how. 3. Define the external instruments to be used with the measurement, such as an RF source for active tuning, Passive Load Pull Tuners, and DC bias. Learn how. 4. Perform an NVNA calibration at the defined frequencies. 5. Start the Arbitrary Load Control application. Learn how. The parameters from NVNA setup are uploaded to the ALC application. 6. ON the DC tabs, validate and select the DC bias conditions for measurement. 206

207 7. On the Load tabs, pick a single frequency at a low power point, and set load grid. Measure and verify that the DUT is providing expected results. 8. Adjust the grid if necessary after viewing the contours. Enable power sweeps, more frequencies etc., and re-measure. 9. View contours and various displays to analyze DUT behavior. 10. When the conditions presented to the component are correct for model extractions, enable the X-parameters and generate the model. How to Start ALC In the NVNA, click Utility, then Arbitrary Load Control. ALC Overview tab help The Arbitrary Load Control overview is summarized in the first dialog. It provide general overview about the ALC application and describe the typical process flow to perform an X-parameter measurement and extraction. Measure DC - Setup tab help 207

208 The purpose of this dialog box: To further refine and edit the DC Bias settings. Note: You must have FIRST configured the SMU settings in the Instrument Control dialog. Learn how. Input Bias (Defined in SMU configuration as VDC_1 or VDC_3) Bias Mode - (Set) Voltage or Current (the opposite is measured). To change this setting, return to the Instrument Control dialog. Learn how DC Bias - Edit the Start, Stop, and (Number of) Points settings as necessary. Reverse DC Output Terminals - When the DUT requires a negative bias value, but the DC supply can only output a positive value, you must manually reverse the terminals to cause the output to be negative. Check this setting to tell the NVNA that you have manually reversed the terminals. As a result, this setting and displayed plots show negative DC values. Output Bias (Defined in SMU configuration as VDC_2 or VDC_4) Bias Mode - (Set) Voltage or Current (the opposite is measured). To change this setting, return to the Instrument Control dialog. Learn how DC Bias - Edit the Start, Stop, and (Number of) Points settings as necessary. Output Bias Offset - Set the amount of time to wait (in milliseconds) between when the Input and Output Bias is applied and removed. The offset is applied both when the bias is turned ON AND OFF. In the above dialog image, this setting is shown by the RED arrows. Measure DC - Measure tab help 208

209 The purpose of this dialog box: To perform DC bias measurements. After measuring, they can be selected on the following Select tab. X-Axis Input - The Input (VDC_1 or VDC_3) parameter is measured and plotted. Output - The Output (VDC_2 or VDC_4) parameter is measured and plotted. Measure - Click to start DC measurements. The RF is turned off. Measure DC - Select tab help 209

210 The purpose of this dialog box: To select the DC Bias measurement to be used in the Load measurement. Choose Fixed Bias - The values that are defined as Fixed on the DC Setup tab appear here. Input - VDC_1 or VDC_3. Output - VDC_2 or VDC_4 Voltage or Current setting - Select the fixed voltage or current. Selected Sweep Bias Click one or more RED bias points from those that appear in the measured grid. Those points then appear in the Selected column. These will be available to select from in subsequent load pull measurements. Measure Load - Mode tab help 210

211 Learn more about this setting in Three_Methods_to_Perform_Load_Control. Measure Load - Stimulus Setup tab help The purpose of this dialog box: To further configure or change the ALC measurement. Note: Hybrid settings (shown here) are a superset of the Active and Passive Stimulus settings. 211

212 Many of these settings are copied to the ALC from the NVNA setup dialogs. DC Bias - Input - Shows the specified VDC_1 Bias value at with measurements will be made. Output - Choose from: Sweep All, or select any of the VDC_2 Bias points that were selected on the DC Select tab. RF Power - Set the Start, Stop and (number of) Points. Compression Limit - When more that one data point is selected, the DUT can be driven into compression. Therefore, this setting becomes available. When the DUT gain is no longer linear by the specified value, then the input power will no longer be incremented. Fundamental RF Frequency - Set (and check) up to FOUR arbitrary frequencies at which RF measurements will be made. Acquisition Delay - Set the delay (in milliseconds) between the RF Source setup and the measurement. Active Load - Choose from Internal (PNA source) or External RF Source. Choosing an Internal source disallows X-parameter measurements as there are only two Internal RF sources. The source must already be configured using the Instrument Configuration dialog. Source (Attenuator) Characterization - When Fixed is unchecked, then auto attenuation is selected and the magnitude and phase of an external source must be characterized. The source is cycled through its source attenuator settings and the phase settings are recorded to a lookup table. This allows the phase to be accurately set for each attenuator setting. This characterization is NOT necessary when Fixed Attenuation is checked. A warning icon appears when a characterization is needed. A new characterization is required when frequencies are changed. A green check appears when a characterization has been performed at the selected frequencies. A Source Characterization is NOT stored for future ALC sessions. Fixed Attenuation - Check, then set the amount of source attenuation to use. Auto Measure - Press to measure the input impedance to the Source and Load Tuner at each measurement frequency. OR Do the following: Passive Source Pre-Match - In order to attain the maximum power transfer, enter the approximate fixed real and imaginary input impedance to the Source Tuner. Passive Load Pre-Match - Enter the approximate fixed real and imaginary input impedance to the Load Tuner. Display RF Harmonics - Check to measure and display the harmonics of the selected fundamental frequencies. Measuring harmonics increases the measurement time significantly. Clear this box when first setting up an ALC measurement until you know that the results are as expected. Measure Load - Search tab help 212

213 The purpose of this dialog box: Set the level of accuracy to which the gamma will be set. Note: The Load Search setup is ONLY available when the Load Mode is selected to be Active or Hybrid. Gamma Tolerance Enter the amount of gamma (reflection) from the desired value that will be used to make measurements. This setting is used in conjunction with the Maximum Resolution setting on the Load Grid tab. Max Iterations - Enter the number of attempts ALC will make to set the desired gamma value within the Tolerance setting. When this number of attempts has been made and the gamma value is not within the desired tolerance, the (last / average / closest) of the previous attempts is used. Measure Load - Load Grid tab help 213

214 The purpose of this dialog box: To specify the loads to be applied to the DUT. Load - Choose the method and format for setting load control. A2 - set the load, then measure reflected waves value only. Use this setting when measuring cascaded amplifiers when the expected level of Gamma exceeds 1 (A2/B2) on the Smith Chart. Gamma GX,GY - set the load, then measure incident and reflected waves (A2/B2) in real and imaginary format. Gamma GM,GP - set the load, then measure incident and reflected waves (A2/B2) in magnitude and phase format. For Gamma GX,GY-GX, and GY represents respectively the real and imaginary values of the Gamma. The min and max values of GX and GY are -1 to +1. For A2 and GM/GP, choose from the following: Magnitude Minimum - Enter a minimum power in dbm. Maximum - Enter a maximum power in dbm. Phase (-180 ~ 180 deg) Minimum - Enter a minimum phase in degrees Maximum - Enter a maximum phase in degrees. 214

215 Resolution This will determine the spacing between Gamma Load points or in other word the resolution of the Grid. Increasing or decreasing the resolution will respectively add or delete gamma points on the defined grid between the minimum and maximum values. Please note, If the next data point to be measured is within this minimum resolution, ALC will save time by NOT measuring the data point. However, the interpolated value of the skipped data point will be saved. This setting can never be smaller than the Gamma tolerance setting on the Search tab. Single Point - Check to measure only one point. When enabled the Load grid became transparent and one default point (red dot) is selected. If you desire to select different point you can Click on a different point on the defined Load grid. Measure Click to measure the device performance for one or Multiple Load conditions. The measurements depends on the Stimulus setup that you defined in the Stimulus Setup tab (i.e, power sweep, DC Sweep, frequency sweep and also if a Single Point was enabled). Note: When the Hybrid and Active are selected in the Mode tab, the measurement speed for the Load grid strongly depend to the Load Search Setup (i.e Gamma Tolerance, Max Iteration). Important: When the measurement of one point on the defined load grid is done the color of the measured dot will change from Red to: BLACK or PINK or BLUE. - Black: Meaning that the gamma requested is found and measured accurately for all the power points and it is within the specified Gamma Tolerance that was in the Load Search - BLUE: Meaning that you reached the gain compression point during the power sweep at this gamma. This could occur if the gain compression limit is reached and the compression limit is checked in the stimulus setup. It is important that you know when the gain compression is reached the next power point will not be measured. - PINK : Meaning could not measure and find the requested Gamma within the specified tolerance defined in the load search setup. - RED: Meaning point not measured. Measure Load - Plot Contours softkey help 215

216 The purpose of this dialog box: View the contours for the following measured parameters. One contour 'ring' plots the same level of measured power or efficiency at the specified Frequency, Power, and DC Bias. Pdelivered - Power delivered to the DUT. (Plotted in BLUE) Check, then enter the following: Contours - Number of contours to plot. Step Size - Adjust the resolution between contours. PAE - Power Added Efficiency. (Plotted it RED) Check, then enter the following: Contours - Number of contours to plot. Step Size - Adjust the resolution between contours. Frequency, Power, DC Bias - Select the stimulus conditions for which contours will be plotted. Plot - Click to plot the contours on the defined Load Grid. Display Tabs Frequency 216

217 Time Domain Power Display - Frequency Domain softkey help Measurements are made at all of the settings that were previously configured in the Measure Load and Measure DC softkeys. Choose from Frequency, Power, Input Bias, Load to display the desired measurements. Autoscale: Right click with mouse to select scaling configuration for active display window. For each plot, select Format. Learn more about these choices. All four waves are displayed: An = reference receiver for port n Bn = test port receiver for port n A1 Default setting. Input stimulus wave at Port 1 (DUT input) B1 Output response wave generated from Port 1 (DUT input) 217

218 A2 Input stimulus wave at Port 2 reflected from load or generated by second source (DUT output) B2 Output response wave generated from Port 2 (DUT output). Display - Time Domain softkey help Measurements are made at all of the settings that were previously configured in the Measure Load and Measure DC softkeys. Choose from Frequency, Power, Input Bias, Load to display the desired Voltage or Current waves. Autoscale: Right click with mouse to select scaling configuration for active display window. Four Time Domain waves are plotted versus Time: Voltage at port 1 Voltage at port 2 Current at port 1 218

219 Also available: Current at port 1 / Voltage at port 1 or port 2 Current at port 2 Also available: Current at port 2 / Voltage at port 1 or port 2 Display - Power Parameters softkey help Measurements are made at all of the settings that were previously configured in the Measure Load and Measure DC softkeys. Choose from Frequency, Power, Input Bias, Load to display the desired measurements. Autoscale: Right click with mouse to select scaling configuration for active display window. X-axis: Right click with mouse to select x axis configuration for active display window. The following measurements are displayed: 219

220 Pout in dbm versus Pin Delivered - Power actually delivered to the DUT versus measured power out of the DUT. Gp in db -versus Pin Delivered - Power actually delivered to the DUT versus calculated gain of the DUT. Rho (or gamma) - Scroll over a gamma value to see the actual load value that was presented to the DUT. PAE (%) - Power actually delivered to the DUT versus Power Added Efficiency. Extract Model softkey help The purpose of this dialog box: Measure and save the X-parameter measurements to a file for modeling. DC Bias - Choose from: Sweep All, or select specific DC bias settings. RF Power - Set the Start, Stop and (number of) Points. Compression Limit - This setting becomes available when 2 or more points are selected. Fundamental RF Frequency - Set (and check) up to FOUR arbitrary frequencies at which RF measurements will be made. Acquisition Delay - Set the delay (in milliseconds) between instrument setup and the measurement. 220

221 Save Model File As - Click, then navigate to a folder to which the X-parameters files will be saved. Note: Intermediate Files are created automatically in the ALC application. Do NOT modify the intermediate file setup. Learn more. 1. Extraction Tone Setup Click to Set the ET (extraction tones) and number of harmonics and phases for the extraction in NVNA. Learn how. 2. Source Power Cal Click to perform a new source power calibration for the extraction tones in NVNA. Learn how. 3. Click Measure. Utility softkey help Refresh - Do this when you have made NVNA settings and now want to copy them into the ALC application. This is done automatically the first time that you start ALC. Learn more. Hide NVNA - Do this if measurement speed is important. Save (Load Pull ALC State) - Saves the ALC settings to a *.LPS file for future recall. Recall (Load Pull ALC State) - Loads a previously-saved *.LPS file. About Shows the current revision of the ALC software. Other ALC Utilities Tuner Gamma Verification Tuner Characterization Park Tuner Cascade S2P Files Reverse S2P File ALC Verification Tuner Characterization Overview and Recommendations 221

222 While Tuner Characterizations can take a long time to perform, once done they can be accurate for a year or more. From the NVNA, launch the Tuner Characterization function under utilities. This will shut down the NVNA and bring up the PNA-X. Create a state with a frequency grid which covers all fundamental and harmonic frequencies you plan on measuring. This can be for the current application as well as possibly future applications. It is generally better to create calibration bands instead of one very large file that will work for all situations. It is recommended that the tuner for calibration is configured as a male/female connection. The Maury tuners have a file maximum size limit of 801 frequency points. So Adapters, fixtures etc. cascaded with the tuners should observe this limit as well. Tuner Calibration & Physical Ports Conventions The tuners have a marking which indicates port 1 and port 2. These labels can be renamed by the user if desired, i.e. port 1 can be labeled (DUT side for example). It is Critical to know that during the tuner characterization the defined port 1 on the tuner is connected to port 1 of the PNA-X. Port 2 must be connected to port 2 of the PNA-X. By the tuner convention, port 1 of the tuner will always point to the DUT (See the graphic below). Note, this is directly opposite of all other components, which will have port 2 always point to the DUT. This is a historical artifact which we are forced to live with. To eliminate this confusion, the below graph illustrate how exactly the setup of the tuners must be during the measurement and during the tuner characterizations. 222

223 Concept of Tuner Calibration During the tuner characterization the PNA-X will measure the S-parameters of all the frequencies requested for the tuner. This could include the harmonics even though the tuner might be a single fundamental only tuner. With fundamental only tuners, the harmonics frequencies are uncontrolled because of the nature of the tuner. However, you can always still configure the NVNA to measure the loads at the harmonic frequencies for each tuned fundamental gamma load during the load pull measurements. After the calibration, the user can optionally verify that the measured tuner gamma points accurately and matches the requested gamma points. This can be done one point at a time with the user entering values or the application can generate a list of dispersed point and sweep through them. A table is generated with requested, measured and delta gamma values. In order to verify the gamma of the tuner, the user must also supply the one port S1P termination file for the load condition behind the tuner. In order to measure the termination of the tuner you can pick any available port on your PNA-X, for example port 4, and then perform a ONE port calibration on that specific 223

224 port. After calibrating this port, simply connect the calibrated cable from port 4 to the cable or the adapter that is connected to the back of the tuner. Once connected, please measure the refection S44 of the tuner termination and then save the termination file of the tuner as S1P. The picture below demonstrate how to measure termination file of the tuner during the load pull measurement and after the characterization. This termination file will be used in the tuner Gamma Verification Tab 3 in the Tuner Characterization GUI. After the tuner Gamma has been verified, connection of the open or short standards with the 3dB attenuator and repeat the process if a more expansive test is desired. The user may also validate the Tuner Gamma Verification from the NVNA in the actual measurement configuration before initiating a measurement. This would be done under Utilities > Gamma Tuner Verification. 224

225 Keysight Tuner Characterization In the NVNA, click Utility, then Tuner Characterization When selected, the NVNA closes and the PNA-X firmware appears. Overview help The first tab of the Keysight tuner Characterization GUI explains the process of the Tuner calibration. 225

226 Tuner Characterization help Tuner Characterization measures the calibrated reflection of the tuner. This is required when performing Tuner Instrument Configuration. Tuner Driver USB - Tuner connects to USB ONLY. LXI/USB - Tuner connects to LAN or USB TCPIP - Tuner connects to LAN ONLY. Orientation - Choose from Source (input) or Load (output) Reflection Range 226

227 Point Separation Magnitude - Enter the desired magnitude separation between adjacent data points. Maximum Phase Step - Enter the desired phase separation between adjacent data points. Frequency From the list of fundamental frequencies that are shown, click Ctrl on your keyboard, then select the frequencies at which the tuner characterization should occur. The characterization can be time-consuming, depending on the frequency span and resolution of the measurements. Learn about strategies for performing efficient characterizations. Refresh - If you recently changed the fundamental frequencies in the PNA-X, click to read the list from the PNA-X. Maximum harmonics to measure: For each fundamental that is selected, enter the number of harmonics to also be measured. Characterization File Click... to navigate to and set the filename for the resulting *.s2p file in which the characterization will be saved. Tuner Gamma Verification help 227

228 Tuner Characterization File Click... to navigate to and set the filename for the resulting *.s2p file in which the characterization will be saved. Tuner Termination File - In order to set the gamma correctly, the Tuner Gamma Verification must have a characterization of the reflections from the Tuner output and all of the components back to the PNA test port to which it is connected. See Concept of Tuner Calibration (Link). Tuning Frequency (in GHz) - Enter frequency at which Gamma is to be measured. Gamma Range - Click to set gamma to the maximum reflection setting. This allows you to see if the maximum achievable range is acceptable for your measurements. 228

229 Gamma Format - Select the format in which gamma is to be specified. Choose from: Magnitude Angle Real, Imaginary Add Allow you to Enter and add into the data grid the Gamma based on its Format (Mag/Angle or Real/ Imaginary). Remove Delete the selected Gamma from the data grid. Remove All Delete all the Gamma from the data grid. Auto Generate When clicked, this dialog will create a set of 9 different gamma and populate them into the data grid base on the Gamma format. Start Verification When clicked, the tuner will be set to the specified and selected gamma from the gamma data grid. Then the PNA-X will make a measurement on that gamma to populate the measured gamma values in the gamma data grid. The delta ᴦ is the difference between the targets and measured Gamma. ALC Verification From the Tuner Characterization dialog, click the last tab. or In the NVNA, click Utility, then ALC Verification ALC Verification dialog help This utility allows you to verify that the tuner is characterized properly. 229

230 This dialog looks slightly different when started from the Tuner Characterization dialog. Select Tuner - Choose from Load Tuner or Source Tuner. Properties - Starts the Tuner Configuration dialog. Tuning Frequency (in GHz) - Enter frequency at which Gamma is to be measured. Gamma Range - Click to set gamma to the maximum reflection setting. This allows you to see if the maximum achievable range is acceptable for your measurements. Gamma Format - Select the format in which gamma is to be specified. Choose from: Magnitude Angle Real, Imaginary Add Allow you to Enter and add into the data grid the Gamma based on its Format (Mag/Angle or Real/ Imaginary). Remove Delete the selected Gamma from the data grid. Remove All Delete all the Gamma from the data grid. Auto Generate When clicked, this dialog will create a set of 9 different gamma and populate them into the data grid base on the Gamma format. 230

231 Start Verification When clicked, the tuner will be set to the specified and selected gamma from the gamma data grid. Then the PNA-X will make a measurement on that gamma to populate the measured gamma values in the gamma data grid. The delta ᴦ is the difference between the targets and measured Gamma. If the delta is less than 0.1 color will be green meaning Gamma is reached. If Delta is bigger than 0.1 color is Red meaning gamma is un-reachable. Park Tuner In the NVNA, click Utility, then Park Tuner Park Tuner help Select Tuner - Choose from Load Tuner or Source Tuner. Carriage - Choose the carriage number. Position - The position for each tuner is either printed on the tuner or provided in the tuner manual. Park - When clicked, the tuner will be set to a park position. Cascade S2P Files In the NVNA, click Utility, then Cascade S2P Files Cascade and ReverseS2P Files dialog help 231

232 This utility allows you to combine two or three *.S2P files into a single *.S2P file that represents an entire chain of components such as cables, adapters, or fixtures. Click You MUST already have the *.S2P files that model the components. Create the *.S2P files using the PNA Characterize Adapter Macro. The files MUST be ordered and oriented in the manner in which the physical components are ordered: Keysight S2P convention has PNA Port 2 connected to the DUT. Maury S2P convention has PNA-X Port 1 connected to the DUT. then navigate to and select the *.s2p file for each component. Reverse ports - Check to cause the S2P file to be reversed. For example S21 measurements would be come S12 measurements and vice versa. Select Output Cascaded S2P File. Click filename for the cascaded *.s2p file. then navigate to the folder and assign a Click Cascade to perform the operation. 232

233 This utility allows you to reverse an *.S2P that represents the measurement of components such as cables, adapters, or fixtures. Select Input S2P File Click then navigate to and select the *.s2p file the component that you desire to reverse. Select Output Reversed S2P File. Click then navigate to the folder and assign a filename for the reversed *.s2p file. Click Reverse to perform the operation. Example The following example demonstrate when the Reverse S2P function could be useful. The first graphic shows the PNA-X ports orientation to measure a coupler that could be added as a front block for the input and output tuners. After measuring the S-parameter of the couplers you will need to connect them as a font block following. The Tuner convention as configured in the second graph (Port one of the front panel connected to Port one of the Tuner). Consequently, the output coupler must be swapped relative to how it was measured. So before you add the S2P file of the front block in the Tuner Configuration you MUST use the Reverse S2P function to reverse the measured component and enable the reverse port for this specific S2P file. The output reversed s2p file will represent the right front block for the Load tuner. 233

234 234

235 Load Pull Using NVNA with ATS NVNA Option 520 (N524xA) S94520A (N524xB) extends the X-parameter measurement capability to include the reflected wave at the fundamental frequency at port 2 in the large signal operating point. This eliminates the assumption that it is a small signal, and enables characterization of components under highly mismatched conditions with high levels of accuracy even under heavy compression. The large signal at the fundamental frequency at port 2 is achieved by inserting a tuner into the measurement setup. See Block Diagram. The load selection and tuner control is handled by Maury s ATS software, which runs directly on the PNA-X. ATS version 5.1 or higher is required. In this topic: Benefits Setup and Configuration Calibration Making Measurements See Also App Note: Load Pull with X-Parameters Produces Instant Large Signal Models Load-Pull + NVNA = Enhanced X-Parameters for PA Designs with High Mismatch and Technology-Independent Large-Signal Device Models Benefits When the Maury ATS is combined with the NVNA in a load pull setup, the following measurements can be made: 1. Vector measurements of the incident and reflected waves at the source and load ports at the fundamental and harmonic frequencies. This is very comprehensive measurement which includes the following data: Delivered output power Available input power Delivered input power Am/pm conversion Time domain waveforms 2. X-Parameter measurements, which are a major industry breakthrough when used with the Maury ATS load pull system. Load-dependent x-parameters are unique to the combination of the Keysight NVNA with the Maury load pull system. 235

236 The measurement creates a file which can be used directly as a PHD large signal device model in the non-linear ADS simulator. The PHD model is extremely accurate since it is based directly on the load pull measurement. With other large signal models, load pull data is often used as the reference for checking model accuracy, since most analytical or compact models are developed from small signal and bias data, and extrapolated to large signal operation. The PHD model uses the reference load pull data directly. A sweep plan measurement can include power, bias, gamma and frequency. This will produce a comprehensive PHD model that can be used to simulate and design complex power amplifiers, such as multi-stage or Doherty amplifiers. The PHD model is a black box model, so is also independent of the device technology (such as GaAs or GaN, for example), and can be shared without showing any proprietary device details. Setup and Configuration The following configuration information provides a high level overview. Refer to Maury ATS information for detailed procedures: 1. Install Software Install the ATS software onto the PNA-X / NVNA. This may require an external CD drive or a mapped drive to an external PC. Learn how to map a drive. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Start the ATS software and select nvna.cfg as the configuration file. This will setup all the recommended options, so usually the only thing left is to configure the tuners and bias instruments. Note: The original nvna.cfg is included as a template to simplify the setup, so save the config file into a new name before starting to customize it. Block diagram of a typical load pull setup with the Keysight NVNA. 236

237 The NVNA X-parameter measurements are controlled using the Maury LSNA block diagram components. Note: To switch between the NVNA and ATS apps, Minimize either application to see the PNA-X desktop. From there, either application can be launched. Alt + tab can also be used from a keyboard connected to the PNA. 2. Setup NI compatibility The PNA-X must be configured to run the ATS GPIB drivers. Note: The following procedure reflects the terminology used in Keysight IO Libraries Suite 14. Later versions use similar, but not identical terminology. In the PNA-X 1. Click File, then Minimize Application 2. On the PNA-X desktop, click Start then Programs then Keysight IO Libraries Suite then Keysight Connection Expert 3. Select Tools then Options then Keysight 488 Options 4. Check Use the Keysight 488 Library where possible then click OK 5. Right-click GPIB0 then select Change Properties 6. Click Keysight 488 Properties and note the GPIB board number. This is the address of the GPIB board to use in the ATS software. The factory default is 10(GPIB10). 7. Click OK to close each ACE dialog. In the ATS software 1. From the main block diagram menu, select Setup Instruments 2. Click GPIB Board. 3. Check GPIB and type the address of the GPIB board from above step Setup the Maury Tuners Set up the correct driver for each tuner: For USB tuners, connect them using the USB connectors on the PNA-X For tuners using a GPIB controller, connect them using the GPIB connector on the rear panel of the PNA-X. 4. Setup the Bias Normally, the ATS software should control the bias supplies, and the NVNA should read the bias in order to get the most accurate X-parameters. The ATS software will then read the bias from the NVNA. 1. In the NVNA, click Utility, then External Instruments, then GPIB Instrument Control. 2. In the ATS software, set up the bias supplies as normal. 237

238 3. To read the bias from the NVNA, use the voltmeter driver vmnvnacom.dll and the current meter driver imnvnacom.dll. Calibration 1. Start the ATS software, and initialize the tuners to ensure that they are in the Z0 position. 2. In the NVNA App a. Set the desired fundamental frequency range and the number of harmonics. b. Set the start and stop power to be equal (1 power point). c. Set the start and stop bias to be equal (1 bias point). d. Click Apply e. Calibrate the NVNA. 3. In the ATS software, click the LSNA icon, and select the reference plane that matches the actual NVNA cal. This is required for the ATS to correctly de-embed the measurements as the tuners move to different impedances. The choices are: 1. DUT this means that the NVNA cal was at the intended DUT planes 2. Tuner this means that the fixture was removed for the NVNA cal, so the reference planes are at the tuner plane that will be next to the fixture 3. Test Port this means that the NVNA calibration planes are outside of the calibrated tuning blocks. 4. Connect a THRU standard at the DUT reference planes, and do a CW power calibration. Making Measurements 1. In the ATS software, select Measurements ->CW, or click the CW button on the toolbar. This will launch the interactive power measurement screen. 2. To measure X-Parameters, select Setup then Select Measurement Parameters then double-click X-Params to highlight it. If a measurement with NO X- parameters is desired, double-click to un-highlight X-Params. Note: Time domain measurements will be made even if X-Params is not selected. 238

239 3. The available measurements include single point, load pull, source pull, power sweeps, bias sweeps, and the sweep plan. The sweep plan measurement is the most comprehensive, and is generally suggested for creating a PHD model file. Up to 7 variables are allowed, including power, bias, gamma (source or load), and frequency variables. 4. Time domain data will be saved in any measured data file. 5. If selected, X-parameter data is saved in a separate file, adding the suffix _PHD to the specified base filename and using the extension.mdf. Learn more. Last Modified: 5-Feb-2009 New topic 239

240 Utilities Settings View Error Terms Nominal DC Values Wave Definitions Reference Impedance Limit Measurement Bandwidth (separate topic) Preset and User Preset (separate topic) Firmware Visible External Instruments Phase Reference Instrument Control View Error Terms Click Utility, then View Error Terms View Error Terms dialog box help 240

241 Shows all 8 error terms, where: exx is from the following flow diagram pn = port number If Load Match measurements have been performed, those will also be displayed. Format Choose the format in which to display the error terms Nominal DC Values Click Utility, then Nominal DC Values Nominal DC Values dialog box help Allows you to add DC offsets to voltage and current Time Domain plots. V1 Specify offset to add to port 1 incident voltage wave. I1 Specify offset to add to port 1 incident current wave. V2 Specify offset to add to port 2 incident voltage wave. I2 Specify offset to add to port 2 incident current wave. Wave Definitions Click Utility, then Wave Definitions 241

242 Wave Definition dialog box help NVNA traditional Amplitude in sq root of watts (default setting). LSNA Definitions in peak Volts. This setting will affect saved data and some plots. To convert from NVNA to LSNA definition, use the following equation: LSNAwave = sqrt(2*zo) * NVNAwave See Overview for details. Reference Impedance Click Utility, then Reference Impedance Reference Impedance dialog box help The reference impedance can be changed for measuring devices with an impedance other than 50 ohms, such as waveguide devices. The NVNA mathematically transforms and displays the measurement data as though the PNA-X ports were the specified impedance value. Physically, the test ports are always about 50 ohms. This setting will affect saved data and some plots. Impedance Displays the current reference impedance. For 75 ohm devices: 1. Change the system Z0 to 75 ohms. 2. Connect minimum loss pads (75 ohm impedance) between the analyzer and the DUT to minimize the physical mismatch. 242

243 3. Perform a calibration with 75 ohm calibration standards. For waveguide devices: 1. Change the system Z0 to 1 ohm. 2. Perform a calibration with the appropriate waveguide standards. FW Visible Click Utility, then FW Visible When checked, the PNA-X Firmware application is visible during all operations. Although visible, it will be initially displayed behind the NVNA application. Use Alt-Tab to switch back and forth between the two displays, or minimize the NVNA application and restore it from the taskbar. When cleared (default setting) the PNA-X Firmware is not visible. However, it may become visible during some long measurements to allow aborting of the measurement. Do NOT change settings using the PNA-X FW. This may cause errors or invalidate measurements. Do NOT exit or close the PNA-X FW or the NVNA application will be unusable. Either hide the PNA-X FW or exit the NVNA application normally. Other Utility Selections Last Modified: 1-May-2008 New topic 243

244 Instrument Control These dialogs are used to configure an external instrument (such as a DC power supply) and read data from the instrument for each measurement data point. See Also To configure an external RF source, see External Source Configuration. To configure instruments for Active Load Control, see ALC Instrument Configuration. See Examples (scroll down). To launch the following dialog: Click Utility, then External Instruments, then Instrument Control Instruments dialog box help Add Instrument (Generic) - Launches the Instrument Configuration dialog. Add Instrument (SMU) - Launches the (Source Measure Unit) SMU Configuration dialog. Add Instrument (Source) - Launches the External Source Configuration dialog. Add Instrument (Tuner) - Launches the Tuner Configuration dialog. Edit Instrument Launches the Instrument Configuration dialog based on the selected configured instrument. Remove Instrument Deletes the selected Instrument configuration. Swept Variables Launches the Variable Configuration dialog. Note: For instruments which are not pre-defined in the GUI, see the generic NVNA Instrument Control dialog help page. The Generic interface control is also used to enhance pre-defined instrument code by using the Advanced mode to add additional code to the Basic code generated. 244

245 SMU Configuration dialog box help Properties Name - Add a descriptive name for the SMU. Model - Select the SMU family. Choose from N67XX, B29XX, or other families. To control SMU models other than these, click Advanced Mode. Then you can send your ordered list of SCPI commands to the SMU. IO Configuration - Select from a list of external instrument addresses that are connected to the PNA. Instrument Settings For each Channel (or module) to be measured: Enable - Check to use the specified SMU for that measurement. Source Type - Choose either Voltage or Current source. Source Level Setup - Choose from the following: Fixed Value - The SMU will be set to the same value for every data point. Variable - The SMU can be set to a different value for each data point. Source Level - For Fixed values, choose a constant voltage or current level. For Variable bias values, select a voltage or current variable name. Important - Variable names are chosen deliberately for NVNA and associated modeling programs. VDC = voltage source _1 = bias is associated with input port 1 _2 = bias is associated with output port 2 _3 = bias is associated with input port 3 _4 = bias is associated with output port 4 245

246 To be included in the saved X-parameters (*.mdif) file, ALL bias channels (including FIXED) MUST be defined as a variable. Then define the value as fixed in the Swept Variable dialog. Reverse Output - Enabling the reverse output on an SMU channel allow to multiply the variable value, configured in the variable configuration, by minus one (-1 x var). It is important to know that enabling the reverse output do not reverse the physical bias value and you must swap the physical polarity on the SMU side in order to have a physical negative bias to drive the DUT. You can use this feature if you are using an SMU that cannot provide and accept a negative voltage/current value. Note: Enabling the Reverse Output Limit - The Source will be limited to this value for the measurement. Measured Variable - A pre-configured variable is assigned. The bias on some DUTs must be turned ON in a specific sequence and react differently when a delay is allowed between these settings. For example, on some FETs, the Drain voltage must be set BEFORE a Gate voltage. The following FOUR settings control the sequence and timing when providing bias to the DUT. For more information: See DC Bias Timing Example (below) Refer to your SMU documentation. See the N67xx app note: Properly Powering ON and Off Multiple Power Inputs Offset Delay - Sets a delay to allow the DC source to settle before and after making other DC settings or measurements. Safe Mode - Choose from the following: None - No sequence or delay. All bias values are set simultaneously. Point - Delay and Safe State settings occur after each data point. Sweep - Delay and Safe State settings occur after each sweep. Safe Value - Sets the value to which the channel will be set for the specified Safe Mode. Turn off after measurement - Check to turn the SMU off after each measurement. Clear (uncheck) to leave the SMU on between measurements. Do this for DC supply lines. Swept Variables - Starts the Variable Configuration dialog. Learn more. Generic Mode - Starts the following dialog. 246

247 As a result, all communications with this instrument will be viewable and edited as SCPI commands using the Instrument Configuration dialog. Learn more. DC Bias Timing Examples Example 1 shows how to configure the ALC application to achieve the following DC Bias Timing for a FET: Channel 1 - Input Bias (Gate voltage) Note: These values will be inverted when applied to the DUT. The polarity was swapped at the SMU because the module did not support a negative supply. Settings: Reverse Output = true, Offset Delay = 0; Safe Mode = None; Turn off after measurement = True Channel 2 - Output Bias (Drain voltage) Note: These values are NEGATIVE when applied to the DUT. Settings: Offset Delay =100 msec; Safe Mode = Sweep; Safe Value= 500 mv; Time at safe level = 100 msec; Turn off after measurement = True, Reverse Output = false 1. The Gate immediately steps to -3 V. 2. After the specified Drain Offset Delay of 100 msec, the Drain voltage steps to +1 V, then to +2 V, then to the specified Sweep Safe Mode voltage of +500 mv. Safe 247

248 mode is applied after each sweep sequence. (Maybe we should talk about this section) 3. It waits for the specified 100 msec 'at safe level'. 4. The Gate voltage steps to -2 V and the Drain voltage steps again to 1 V, then to 2 V. 5. At the end of the measurement, the Drain voltage goes OFF. If the "Turn off after measurement" box was cleared, the Drain voltage would be set to the Safe level of 500 mv. 6. After the specified Drain Offset Delay (100 msec), the Gate voltage goes to OFF. How to achieve this timing In the Instrument Control dialog, make the following settings. Click Swept Variables. Then for each variable, set the following voltage levels: 248

249 Example 2 The following example shows exactly the same variable and voltage setup as example 1, except for the following: Safe Mode = Point for both variables. Offset Delay = 0 for both variables. 249

250 1. The Gate immediately steps to -3 V. 2. The Drain voltage immediately steps to 1 V, then drops to the specified Point Safe Mode voltage of 500 mv. 3. After the specified 100 msec 'at safe level', the Drain voltage steps to +2 V. 4. The Gate and Drain voltages both drop to the specified Point Safe Mode voltage of -500 mv. 5. The Drain voltage steps to 3 V and the Gate voltage steps again to 1 V. 6. The Gate voltage then drops to the specified Point Safe Mode voltage of -500 mv and waits for the specified 100 msec 'at safe level'. 7. The Gate voltage steps to -2 V. 8. At the end of the measurement, the Gate and Drain voltages goes OFF. If the "Turn off after measurement" boxes were cleared, both voltages would be set to the Safe level of 500 mv. Generic Instrument Configuration dialog box help This function enables the user to communicate with any device through a SCPI interface. The user would enter commands that are appropriate for the device. 250

251 Note: Envelope measurements do NOT support measurement commands. This dialog is launched when the Add Instrument or Edit Instrument button is clicked on the Instruments dialog. 1. Click Address in the Instrument Properties to Search for Instruments. 2. Search for Instruments - Click to scan GPIB and LAN for instruments. 3. When Instruments Found appears, select an instrument, then click OK. Instrument Command Properties and Example Important - The syntax for Instrument Commands has changed with NVNA 2.0. Use the syntax in the following Example Property Values. See Select External Sweep to Display when swept variables are defined. Note: Envelope measurements do NOT support measurement commands. About the Commands The commands stored in the various Command fields are sent directly to the SCPI String Parser of the PNA-X, so must contain fully qualified commands to the PNA-X. Example - The result of this setup is that at each combination of swept variables, frequency, and power, the current is measured by the DMM and returned to the NVNA 251

252 where it is stored in an array to be used in X-parameter extraction and included in data files. The instrument is an Keysight N6705A DC Power Analyzer. Instrument Commands Example Property Values Name Contains an identifier for the instrument which is used for identification purposes in the user interface. Address Click Search for Instruments. The Property value will be filled with the qualified address as shown in the example. To send commands to the PNA, enter address -1. This can be useful for configuring a 'dummy' source for experimental purposes. When doing this, remove all commands from the Instrument Properties field. Measured Variables An array of names of dependent variables being measured by the instrument - one per line of text input. The variable names are written to output files as dependent variable names. Measured values are also included, and are placed at zero frequency. Initialization Commands Commands sent immediately after opening a session to the instrument. These commands are sent only once per session. Outer Loop Commands Commands sent at each combination of swept variable values. Commands to set external source output levels should be set here. 252

253 The values of swept variables listed in the instrument s Swept Variables field may be accessed here using the syntax %<var>%, where <var> is the desired variable. Measurement Commands Commands sent at each combination of swept variable and frequency/power values (i.e. every stimulus setting). Note that each line of commands should return a value, but multiple commands may be sent on one line and separated by a semicolon. There should be one line for each variable name in the Measured Variables field of the instrument. Closing Commands Commands sent immediately before closing a session to the instrument. These commands are sent only once per session. Timeout Contains the amount of time (in ms) to wait for a response when opening a session with the instrument. Buttons Write to Instrument Click to precede a command with WRITE Read from Instrument Click to precede a command with READ Wait Statement Click to precede a wait value with WAIT. Load Instrument from File Recalls a previously saved Instrument *.scfg (source configuration) file from the PNA-X hard drive. Save Instrument to File Saves the current source configuration settings to a *.scfg (source configuration) file on the PNA-X hard drive. Insert Variable Reference Some commands are sent with variables that contain the values that are set in the configuration dialogs. Select a variable, then click Insert Variable. The variable is inserted into the command at the cursor location in the Property Value field. View / Edit Sweep Launches the Variable Configuration Dialog Last Modified: 31-Mar-2015 New diag for ALC 253

254 6-Oct-2011 New syntax for Nov-2010 Major changes for Jun May May-2008 Markups for SweptVar. Modified for External Sweep display New topic 254

255 Preset and User Preset Preset Click Utility, then Preset to cause all of the current Measurement Class settings to revert to the default values. User Preset To access the following dialog: Click Utility then User Preset User Preset dialog box help With an NVNA User Preset saved and enabled, when Preset (User Defined) is selected, the User Preset settings are recalled instead of the standard NVNA default settings. The Measurement Class is recalled with a User Preset. User Preset Enable Check - NVNA is set to User Preset conditions when Preset. Clear - The current measurement class is set to default values when Preset. Save current state as User Preset Click to store the current NVNA state as the User Preset conditions. Load existing file as User Preset Click to retrieve an instrument state to be used as the User Preset conditions. Load last state on restart When NVNA is started, it is restored to exactly the same conditions that it was in when it was shutdown. Once a User Preset has been saved, click Preset (User Defined) to perform a User Preset. 255

256 Last Modified: 4-Aug-2010 New topic 256

257 Phase Reference Setup To access this dialog: Click Utility, then External Instruments, then Phase Reference: Make sure Source Enabled is checked. The source will not actually be setup until a measurement configuration has been applied. Click Detect to find the phase references that are connected to the USB. The following dialog appears: Select the Phase Reference during the Phase Reference Cal. Click Source Setup to launch the following dialog. Phase (Reference) Source Setup dialog box help Note: The phase reference is NOT required when making fundamental-only measurements. When the harmonic number is set to 1 (fundamental-only), then the calibration will skip the phase cal step. However, the phase reference IS required when attempting to calibrate Multitone and Mixer measurements, even when the harmonic number is set to 1. The Source frequency and divide ratios set the spacing for the phase reference combs. Source Choose from: 257

258 Internal Use the PNA-X second internal source out Port 3 to drive the Phase Reference. External Use an external GPIB, LAN, or USB-connected source to drive the Phase Reference. Click Properties to search for and connect to an external source to drive the Phase Reference. Learn more. 10 MHz Reference Use the 10 MHz Reference to drive the Phase Reference. To learn how to connect the Phase References, see the connection diagram for your measurement configuration. General Hardware Configuration Envelope Hardware Configuration Mixer Hardware Configuration Multitone Hardware Configuration Address Set the VISA address strings of the GPIB / LAN / USB external source. Properties Click to search for and connect to an external source. Learn more. Power Power level from the source to the Phase Reference. Set to a higher power level to compensate for path loss to the phase reference. Otherwise use the default value. Divide Ratios and Desired PRF These settings work together to set the spacing for the phase reference comb. Divide Ratio The value that the phase reference divider is set to. The Desired PRF is multiplied by this number to arrive at the resulting source frequency. A higher Divide Ratio will help reduce phase noise, especially at low PRFs. Auto Calculate Check to cause NVNA to calculate the optimum Desired PRF and Divide Ratio based on the currently-applied measurement configuration. Ext Divide Ratio The value that the Desired PRF is multiplied by to arrive at the resulting source frequency when using external dividers. External dividers will help reduce phase noise, especially at low PRFs. Desired PRF The pulse frequency that comes out of the phase reference. This will be the frequency spacing between combs. For example, with Auto Calculate unchecked, the following settings: Desired PRF = 100 MHz Divide Ratio = 2 Ext Divide Ratio = 4 Resulting Source Freq = 800 MHz Yield 100 MHz, 200 MHz, 300 MHz, and so forth, out of the Phase Reference. Values are NOT checked for validity until the current measurement configuration has been applied by pressing Apply on the main dialog. External Source (for Phase Reference) Configuration 258

259 This dialog is used to configure an external source to drive the phase reference. See the External Source Configuration dialog which configures the source to drive the DUT. How to access this dialog: With External Source selected on the Phase Reference Setup dialog, Click Properties. External Source Configuration dialog box help Name - Add a descriptive name for the source. Driver - Select the external source model, or choose AGGeneric for sources that are not listed. Power Offset Specify the power offset value in db. Note: The power offset value could be used when performing high power amplifier measurement. In this case an external driver amplifier can be added at the input and output of the device. The Power offset value represent the Power Gain value of the driver amplifier. Pulse Mode Enable or disable the pulse mode for the external source IO Configuration - Select from a list of external instrument addresses that are connected to the PNA. Refresh - Click to scan GPIB and LAN for instruments. 259

260 The Advanced tab is used to add SCPI commands which can extend source configuration capability. Learn more. When making a connection with the RF Source, there is no need to specify the Model. All Keysight MXG and ESG, (some PSG) sources use the same SCPI commands listed in the Instrument Properties field. Other manufacturer's RF sources may work with some of the commands listed below, but modification is probably necessary. Click Address in the Instrument Properties to show the Search for Instruments, Test Connection, and Identify Instrument buttons. Note: To send commands to the PNA, enter address -1. This can be useful for configuring a 'dummy' source for experimental purposes. When doing this, remove the Property Values for all command types listed in the Instrument Properties field. Note: In NVNA 1.0, the GPIB (NOT VISA) addresses were listed and also saved with instrument state (*.ncm) and source configuration (*.scfg) files. When these files are recalled into later VNA releases, to make changes to the source configuration files, you must either change the address to a simple GPIB address (for example, 19) or change the command properties to the newer Write: <command> syntax. Commands Note: When communicating with Keysight MXG, ESG, some PSGs sources, it is usually NOT necessary to send or modify the following commands. However, if problems occur, you can view and modify these commands to the syntax that is expected by the source. Refer to the source programming documentation for more details. Initialization Commands Commands sent immediately after opening a session to the instrument. These commands are sent only once per session. If necessary, use the following groups of commands to modify communication with the source. Click a group, then modify the individual commands as necessary. Closing Commands Commands sent immediately before closing a session to the instrument. These commands are sent only once per session. 260

261 Timeout Contains the amount of time (in ms) to wait for a response when opening a session with the instrument. About the Commands The commands stored in the various Command fields are sent directly to the SCPI String Parser of the PNA-X, so must contain fully qualified commands. Before the commands are sent, references to %INST% are replaced by the session ID of the connection to the instrument. The Write to Instrument and Read from Instrument buttons will automatically insert fully qualified write and read commands to which any needed arguments may be added. During the Outer Loop Commands, references to the swept variables in the form %n% where n is the index of the variable as listed in the Swept Variable field are replaced by the values of those variables in the current iteration of the loop. Buttons Write to Instrument Sends command string to the instrument. Read from Instrument Reads query response from the instrument. Wait Statement Sends wait command to the instrument. Save Source to File Saves the current source configuration settings to a *.scfg (source configuration) file on the PNA-X hard drive. Load Source from File Recalls a previously saved Instrument *.scfg (source configuration) file from the PNA-X hard drive. Insert Variable Reference Some commands are sent with variables that contain the values that are set in the configuration dialogs. Select a variable, then click Insert Variable. The variable is inserted into the command at the cursor location in the Property Value field. Last Modified: 14-Nov Sep Jul Jun Aug-2010 Swap divide ratios Clarified Phase Ref requirement Added Ext Source content Added Properties button New topic 261

262 Preferences NVNA preferences are settings that survive a Preset or PNA-X Shutdown. NVNA Preferences are listed on this page with links to locations that provide more information. How to set NVNA Preferences Click Utility then Preferences Click Defaults to restore preferences to their default settings Preferences dialog box help A checked box makes the following statements true unless stated otherwise. X-axis displays measured Pin (Power in) instead of source power settings. When checked, the measured values of the fundamental A1 waves are always displayed on the X-axis. This is the actual power that is applied to the DUT. No warning message when hardware setup changes. Check to NOT display these warning messages, but select Yes automatically. No "port configuration" message when measurement class changes. Check to NOT display these warning messages, but select No automatically. 262

263 Confirm measurement class change when recalling a state. Check to see the Measurement Class dialog when recalling a state file that requires a change in measurement class. No "compatibility" message when recalling a previous version state. Check to NOT display this warning message. In the Port Bypass Switch dialog, for ports 1 and 3 you may select the Combiner path. By default (checked in this preference setting), a warning message appears during the calibration to prompt you to choose to keep the Combiner path or change to Thru path. When cleared, there is no warning message. The switch is always switched back to Thru path automatically during calibration. Backward compatible with Maury ATS Check to enable backward compatibility with Maury ATS. Learn more. Last Modified: 24-May Jun-2011 Added combiner preference MX New topic 263

264 264

265 S2P File Reversal and Cascading In the NVNA, click Utility, then Cascade S2P Files Cascade and ReverseS2P Files dialog help Cascade S2P Files This utility allows you to combine two or three *.S2P files into a single *.S2P file that represents an entire chain of components such as cables, adapters, or fixtures. Click You MUST already have the *.S2P files that model the components. Create the *.S2P files using the PNA Characterize Adapter Macro. The files MUST be ordered and oriented in the manner in which the physical components are ordered: Keysight S2P convention has PNA Port 2 connected to the DUT. Maury S2P convention has PNA-X Port 1 connected to the DUT. then navigate to and select the *.s2p file for each component. Reverse ports - Check to cause the S2P file to be reversed. For example S21 measurements would be come S12 measurements and vice versa. Select Output Cascaded S2P File. Click filename for the cascaded *.s2p file. then navigate to the folder and assign a Click Cascade to perform the operation. Reverse S2P File 265

266 This utility allows you to reverse a single *.S2P that represents the measurement of components such as cables, adapters, or fixtures. Select Input S2P File Click then navigate to and select the *.s2p file the component that you desire to reverse. Select Output Reversed S2P File. Click then navigate to the folder and assign a filename for the reversed *.s2p file. Click Reverse to perform the operation. Example The following example demonstrate when the Reverse S2P function could be useful. The first graphic shows the PNA-X ports orientation to measure a coupler that could be added as a front block for the input and output tuners. After measuring the S-parameter of the couplers you will need to connect them as a font block following. The Tuner convention as configured in the second graph (Port one of the front panel connected to Port one of the Tuner). Consequently, the output coupler must be swapped relative to how it was measured. So before you add the S2P file of the front block in the Tuner Configuration you MUST use the Reverse S2P function to reverse the measured component and enable the reverse port for this specific S2P file. The output reversed s2p file will represent the right front block for the Load tuner. 266

267 267

268 Analysis Topics Markers S-Parameter Measurements X-Parameter Measurements Last Modified: 4-Aug-2010 New topic 268

269 X-Parameters In this topic: Overview X-Parameter Configuration X-Parameter Display Simulating with X-parameters X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems References *X-parameters is a trademark and registered trademark of Keysight Technologies in the US, EU, JP, and elsewhere. The X-parameters format and underlying equations are open and documented. For more information, visit Overview X-parameters are a rigorous, mathematically-correct linearization of device under test (DUT) behavior as represented by a spectral map from incident to scattered pseudo-waves. Unlike classic S-parameters, which capture only linear device behavior and ignore nonlinear behavior such as harmonic/intermod generation and even same-frequency higher order mixing effects, X-parameters capture linear device behavior and linearize nonlinear behavior about a large signal operating point (LSOP). This is achieved by stimulating the DUT with one or more large tones at one or more ports (defining the LSOP) and, while the large signal(s) are still present, injecting additional small 'extraction' tones at all ports, at all tones of interest separately. At least two phase-offset small tones must be injected at each port/frequency of interest in order to extract the corresponding X-parameters. All resulting waves are measured for each stimulus, and the X-parameters are solved for directly (if only two phases are used) or using regression (in the case of 3 or more phases). See Also X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems Notation and Equations for Multiport / Multitone X-parameters (pdf) X-Parameter Configuration How to configure X-Parameters: 269

270 Click Analysis, then Configure X-Parameters X-parameter Configuration appears as a tab in the Multitone Measurement Configuration dialog. This allows you to configure nearly all Multitone settings from this single dialog. Check Enable to turn ON X-Parameter extraction. Enable is NOT available under the following conditions: When S-parameters are enabled. First disable S-parameters by clicking Analysis, then S-Parameters and clear the check. When both internal sources are NOT available for X-Parameters. On the Measurement Configuration dialog, change Hardware Setup or Reference Source so that both internal sources are available for X-parameter measurements. Measurement Class is Envelope. X-Parameters are NOT available with Envelope measurements. Click Extract X-parameters from Intermediate Files to perform X-parameter extraction from large files that were saved to disk rather than use internal memory. Learn how to enable Use Intermediate Files. Select the files to extract in either.xnp or.phd format. X-Parameter Measurement Configuration dialog box help The Extraction tones always use Source 2 in the PNA-X, routed to the appropriate DUT port. Maximum Harmonic/Mixing Order This setting defines the highest harmonic or mixing order at which Extraction Tones (ETs) will be injected into the DUT for XS and XT extraction. For example, if the first seven harmonics of a DUT are desired but only the first 3 harmonic load conditions have a significant affect on DUT behavior, setting this to 3 and setting Maximum Harmonic/Mixing Order to 7 results in XF terms being measured up to the seventh harmonic but XS and XT terms only being measured up to the third harmonic. Eliminating unneeded terms speeds up both measurement and simulation. 270

271 This setting is different from the Max Harmonics/Max Order settings on the General, Multitone, and Mixer Measurement setup dialogs. X-parameters use the Max Harmonics and Mixing Order settings on the General, Multitone, and Mixer setup dialogs to determine where to measure the X F terms (capturing large signal response). This setting relates to the X S and X T terms that capture the small-signal sensitivity. Different settings may be desired for the following reasons: Bandwidth limitations on external amplifiers - Measuring the small-signal sensitivity requires extraction tones, while measuring the large signal response only requires tuning the receiver to an additional frequency. Limiting measurement time/model complexity - The number of X F terms and measurements is linearly proportional to the number of harmonics and mixing products, while the number of X S and X T terms grows exponentially. Often people are interested in measuring high-order harmonics and mixing products without being interested in the sensitivity to mismatch or stimulus. Number of Phase Offset ETs Although two phases are sufficient to allow X-parameter extraction, using additional phases improves both the accuracy and robustness of the extraction. When used with PNA-X firmware A.09.33, a setting of four phases is recommended to provide robust X-parameter extraction in most measurement configurations. However, more phases require more measurement time. Extraction Tone (ET) Level The level of the extraction tone must be small enough to ensure a spectrally-linear response, but large enough to ensure that the response is measurable. A Source Power Cal is performed and both the LSOP and Extraction tones power levels are adjusted to compensate for loss, external amplifiers, and attenuators. Select the method used to set the ET Power Level: The goal of both of the automatic ET Level methods is to determine the largest LSOP signal to appear at the cal reference plane. The Extraction tone is then set 16 db below that level. Automatic ET Level - Gain Based This setting is generally best if the DUT is NOT in hard compression. In hard compression, extraction signal may be low at lower drive levels. The ET level is set 16 db below the LSOP based on the stimulus power and the DUT gain. Port 2 Gain at Max Input Power Enter the DUT gain at the highest stimulus (port 1) power. Port 1 stimulus power is set in various dialogs depending on the Measurement class. Use negative values for Mixers which have conversion loss. Automatic ET Level - Power Based The ET level is set 16 db below the larger of the following power levels: 271

272 The stimulus power which is specified on the setup dialog appropriate for each Meas Class. The Maximum Output Power specified on this dialog. For example: At port 1 (DUT input) suppose the max stimulus power level into the DUT is -10 dbm. If you know the reflection coefficient of port 1 to be -30 db, and there is no component inside the DUT that will generate power out the DUT input, then set the Port 1 Max Output power to -40 dbm. The higher of the two signals is -10 dbm. The extraction level for port 1 is set to 16 db below that value, or -26 dbm. At port 2 (DUT output) you know that the DUT gain at the stimulus power (-10 dbm) is 12 db. Then set the Port 2 Max Output power to +2 dbm. The higher power level (of the INPUT stimulus power of -10 dbm and output of +2 dbm) is +2. The extraction level for port 2 is set to 16 db below +2, or -14 dbm. For Mixers - At port 2 (MUT output) you know that the conversion loss at the stimulus power (-10 dbm) is -2 db. Then set the Port 2 Max Output power to -12 dbm. The higher power level (of the INPUT stimulus power of -10 dbm and output of -12 dbm) is -10 dbm. The extraction level for port 2 is set to 16 db below -10, or -26 dbm. Manual ET Level Manually specify the ET level (advanced users only). Port 1 / 2 ET Level Level of ET to be used at each port. The ports that are available depend on the number of ports being measured. In mixer or 3-port mode, Port 3 is also available. In 1-port mode, only port 1 is available. Stimulus power is set at the following dialog boxes for each Meas Class: Meas Class General Multitone Mixer Stimulus power setting Config Dialog Source Power Tab Meas Config Dialog Port Labels Create a label for each DUT. Select a port, type a label, then click in the Port Labels field to update the text. Port labels are stored in the file, and help the user of the file understand the purpose of each port. Mixer extraction tone option: The LO input is usually driven into saturation and therefore tends to not be very sensitive to small changes in mismatch. Extracting X-parameters on the LO port of the mixer requires an external combiner and possibly an external amplifier for the ET. Because of these two factors, a switch to only capture the XF term on the LO port is provided. This can simplify the measurement setup as well as the total measurement time. The user will need to evaluate is reasonable option for their specific DUT. 272

273 X-Parameter Display How to display X-parameters: With a General, Multitone, or Mixer/Converter measurement configured: Click Response, then Measure, then X-Parameters Quad Display X-parameters can be plotted in log-magnitude, linear-magnitude, phase, real part, or imaginary part vs. frequency or power. They can also be plotted in polar format as functions of either power or frequency with the real part on the X axis and the imaginary part on the Y axis. Understanding the display results First, let's describe two X-parameters: X S pq and X T pq. These two terms relate the incident and scattered waves at the two selected port-tone combinations of interest (labeled p and q) as follows: Δbpq represents the change in the DUT s scattered wave bp due to the phase-normalized incident wave aq. As in S-parameters, the first subscript (p in the example above) is associated with the response signal, and the second subscript (q in the example above) is associated with the incident signal. But because the DUT is driven simultaneously with a large signal, the small signal mixes with the large signal to create cross-frequency contributions, making tone indexing necessary in addition to port indexing. For single-tone measurements, the tone is identified by the harmonic index. For two-tone measurements, the tone is identified 273

274 by its mixing indices. For example, 2,-1 identifies the tone at frequency 2*fund_1-1*fund_2. So, both the p and q terms are described by a Port and Tone combination, as shown highlighted in the following dialog: In the (Port, Tone) field: p (2,1) means port 2, tone 1 (fundamental) frequency q (2,2) means port 2, tone 2 frequency The X-parameter display shows eight terms relating the port-tone combinations p and q. XF Terms How to view XF terms: Click Response, then Measure, then Device Parameters, then Xf Parameter In addition to X S and X T there is an X F term. It is the component of the output due to the large signal input (a11), so is indexed only to the receive port tone X F p. For each possible selection of p, there is exactly one X F term. So in total there are 13 X-parameters for each possible (port, tone) selection of p,. For example, for p=(2,1), and assuming 3 tones of interest: X F

275 (X S 21,11),(X T 21,11) (X S 21,12), (X T 21,12) (X S 21,13), (X T 21,13) (X S 21,21), (X T 21,21) (X S 21,22), (X T 21,22) (X S 21,23), (X T 21,23) For a 2-port device, with 3 tones of interest at each port, there are 6 possible (port, harm) combinations for p. Each combination yields 13 parameters, for a total of 6*13 = 78 X-parameters measured. In order to make it easy to view and understand all of these terms, eight related XS and XT terms are displayed at a time on four separate plots as shown on the dialog box above. XF terms correspond closely to the measured waves B1 and B2 (assuming reasonable load match). Simulating with X-parameters Although subsets of X-parameters can be useful design tools on their own, their true predictive power comes from using the entire set together. Since the X-parameters include both magnitude and phase information enabled by the NVNA the computed Δb terms can be combined, along with the X F terms that capture the nonlinear response to the large input at the fundamental, to accurately predict device response to a wide range of input signals. This includes properly accounting for upstream tones and downstream match. The complete equation for scattered wave prediction is as follows: For simplicity, all waves are phase normalized in the above equation. For the full equation, including phase normalization terms, see X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems below. This powerful predictive ability has been combined with interpolation on frequency and input power (as well as any additional independent variables such as DC bias), phase normalization to guarantee time invariance, and Volterra constraints to ensure physically correct extrapolation below measured power levels in the PHD framework for ADS. To properly incorporate DC bias behavior into PHD, the following naming conventions must be followed (p is the port number): Swept or Measured Variable Swept DC Voltage at port p Swept DC Current at port p Naming Convention VDC_p IDC_p 275

276 Measured DC voltage at port p Measured DC current at port p Vp Ip For additional information on simulation with X-parameters, see the documentation accompanying the PHD Design Kit for ADS, available at the EEsof knowledge center: See XnP Components (X1P-X10P) See XnP File Format X-Parameters Collapse to S-Parameters in Linear Systems Definitions: i = output port index j = input port index k = output frequency index l = input frequency index 276

277 References 277

278 The following references are available for additional information on X-parameters and the PHD framework: [1] D. E. Root et al., Broad-Band Poly-Harmonic Distortion (PHD) Behavioral Models From Fast Automated Simulations and Large-Signal Vectorial Network Measurements, IEEE Trans. MTT, vol. 53, no. 11, pp , November 2005 [2] J. Verspecht and D. E. Root, Poly-Harmonic Distortion Modeling, in IEEE Microwave Theory and Techniques Microwave Magazine, June, [3] J. Verspecht, D. Gunyan, J. Horn, J. Xu, A. Cognata, and D.E. Root, Multi-tone, Multi-Port, and Dynamic Memory Enhancements to PHD Nonlinear Behavioral Models from Large-Signal Measurements and Simulations, 2007 IEEE MTT-S Int. Microwave Symp. Dig., Honolulu, HI, USA, June 2007 [4] J. Horn et al, X-parameter Measurement and Simulation of a GSM Handset Amplifier, accepted for publication at European Microwave Conference, 2008 Last Modified: 18-Nov-2010 Updated for May-2008 New topic 278

279 Markers Markers can be created on any NVNA trace. Up to 4 markers can be created for each trace. A newly-created marker is placed at the lowest X-axis setting on each of the displayed traces. Create a marker by doing either of the following: Click Analysis, then Marker, then click a marker number. Click Analysis, then Marker, then Marker... to launch the following dialog. Select a marker to create, then click ON. To move a marker: click on a marker and drag to an X-axis data point. Marker values can only rest on measured data points. To delete a marker: the two methods to create a marker are also used to delete a maker. To delete ALL markers, click Analysis, then Marker, then All Off. To turn marker readouts ON and OFF, click Response, the Display, then Display Items, then Marker Readout. Learn more. Coupled Markers dialog box help Coupled markers on different traces line up and move together. Markers are coupled by marker number, 1 to 1, 2 to 2, 3 to 3, and so forth. Once set, drag a marker to cause all markers to move together. Click Analysis, then Marker, then Delta Marker... to launch the following dialog. 279

280 Delta Marker dialog box help Delta markers display data relative to the reference marker. There can be only ONE reference marker per trace. All other markers can be delta markers or regular markers. Reference Marker Select a marker as the reference, then select one or more markers as Delta Markers. Last Modified: 3-Apr-2008 New topic 280

281 S-Parameters S-parameters stimulate the device with known small-signal waves in the forward direction, then the reverse, direction and measure resulting waves. Learn all about S-Parameters in the PNA-X Help file. S-parameters are useful when performing small-signal calibration verification. After performing a nonlinear calibration, the S-parameters of small-signal verification standards can be measured to determine the quality of the vector calibration. S-parameters are available in General, Multitone, and Mixer/Converter Measurement Classes. 1. Enable S-parameter measurements: Click Analysis, then Enable S-parameters. 2. Click Single to perform a new measurement. S-parameters are completely separate measurements from other NVNA measurements. The data acquisition processes are NOT compatible. 3. View S-parameter measurements: Click Response then Measure then S- Parameters, then select from the following: Individual S-parameter All S-parameters Quad Display - view available S-parameters in 4 windows. To change stimulus power for each port click Analysis, then S-parameters Power Setup. This sets the internal source power for the specified ports. Enter a stimulus power for each port, then click OK. Note: If an external component is used in the measurement path, you MUST adjust this internal source power setting to compensate for these components. For example, if you want 0 dbm at the calibration plane and you have a 30 db amp in the path, you will need to set the internal source power to -30 dbm for this calibration. For calibration verification, Couple Segments should also be enabled. Last Modified: 15-Jan-2014 Modified text 281

282 14-Nov Jan Nov Apr-2008 Added power diag Added remeasure Removed measure load match New topic 282

283 Programming 283

284 Getting Started with COM/DCOM See Programming Commands. Requirements Both the PC and PNA-X must be on the same LAN and both can see each other. The PC must be using NT4, Windows 2000, XP, or Windows 7. You must be logged on both the PNA-X and PC with an Administrator account (see note below). If Windows Firewall is turned on, NVNAComServer.exe must be on the exceptions list on the PNA. Must have Visual Basic, C++, or C# on the PC. Note: To avoid potential security permission complications, the following examples assume you have added yourself as an administrator on the PNA using the same name and password as that used on your PC. For more DCOM information, see Keysight App Note Procedures Use the following three steps to configure your PC to communicate with the PNA-X using Visual Basic, C++, or C#. 1. Copy and Register the Type Library on your PC 2. Verify DCOM configuration settings on the PC and the PNA 3. Set NVNA References and Run Examples in VB C++, and C# See Also Additional C++ Information 1. Copy and Register the NVNA Type Library on your PC On the NVNA Add the exact Username and Password that you use on the PC. 1. Click Control Panel, then User Accounts 2. Create a new account using your logon on the remote computer 3. Select Computer Administrator 4. Click Create Account 5. Click on your username and select Create a password. Enter the exact password that is used with your logon on the remote computer. On the PC, Map a network drive to your NVNA 1. Click Start Menu 2. Right click Computer 3. Select Map network drive..." 284

285 4. In Folder type \\<pna computer name>\c$. For example: \\a-n5242a-12345\c$ 5. If you setup the username properly in the first step, then you should not be prompted for a username and password. However, if prompted, enter: username: <pna hostname>\pna-admin. For example: a-n5242a-12345\pna-admin; password: agilent Copy the COM server to your PC 1. Create a new directory called c:\nvna on your file system 2. Copy the file NVNAComServer.exe from the NVNA into a folder on your hard disk. On your NVNA, NVNAComServer.exe is located at either: 1. If your PNA is XP: c:\program files\agilent\agilent nonlinear vector network analyzer\nvnacomserver.exe 2. If your PNA is Win7: c:\program files (x86)\agilent\agilent nonlinear vector network analyzer\nvnacomserver.exe 3. Drag the file into the NVNA folder on your PC. Register the NVNA Com Server on your PC 1. Left-click on the start menu. In Search Programs, enter cmd. 2. Right-click on the cmd option and select Run As Administrator. 3. On the User Account Control dialog, select Yes. 4. Enter cd \NVNA on the command line 5. Enter NVNAComServer /regserver on the command line. On the PC 1. Right-click on the file: c:\nvna\nvnacomserver and select Run As Administrator. 2. Test your NVNA registration by using the VBScript 2. Verify DCOM configuration settings on the PC The NVNA software configures the PNA-X for DCOM. On the PC 1. Click the Windows Start button 2. Click Run 3. In the Open: box, type dcomcnfg 4. Click OK Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 7 In the Distributed COM Configuration Properties window: Open the following folder sequence: Component Services Window Open the following folder sequence: Component Services 285

286 1. Click Keysight NVNA in the Applications list. 2. Then click Properties... On the Location tab: Component Services Computers My Computer DCOM Config Right click Keysight NVNA Click Properties Computers My Computer DCOM Config Right click Keysight NVNA Click Properties 1. Check Run application on the following computer. 2. Type the Full PNA-X computer name in the text box. 3. Uncheck the other boxes 3. Set NVNA References in VB, C++, or C# Note: Before doing the following, check Windows Processes (Ctrl-Alt-Delete, Task Manager, Processes). Look for NVNAComServer.exe. If running, then end it. In VB 1. Open a new standard EXE project. 286

287 2. Click Project, then References. 3. Check Keysight NVNA 1.0 Type Library, then click OK. VB Example Dim Nvna As AgilentNVNA.Application Set Nvna = CreateObject("AgilentNVNA.Application", "<full computer name>") Nvna.Preset In C++: Copy the following: #import "C:\\Program Files\\Agilent\\Keysight Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer\\NVNAComServer.exe" no_namespace named_guids IApplication *nvna = NULL; CoInitialize(NULL); HRESULT hr = CoCreateInstance(CLSID_Application, NULL, CLSCTX_SERVER, IID_IApplication, reinterpret_cast<void**>(&nvna)); if (FAILED(hr)) { } _tprintf(_t("couldn't create the instance!... 0x%x\n"), hr); Return; nvna->preset(); In C#: In the solution explorer, right-click Project References. Click Add Reference 287

288 Select COM tab and Keysight NVNA 1.0 Type Library, then click OK. // Connect to NVNA myapplication = new AgilentNVNA.Application(); myapplication.preset(); Additional C++ Information Each programming command in NVNA help has a C++ Syntax description line, as in the following: HRESULT GetErrorTerm(BSTR errorterm, VARIANT *data) When we use this function In Visual C++, we may have the following input which doesn't match with the above definition. _variant_t IApplication::GetErrorTerm(_bstr_t name) This is not a problem with the function call. The C++ syntax that is shown in NVNA help is a raw interface definition. The #import Visual C++ compiler directive has many attributes, such as no_namespace named_guids or raw_interfaces_only. Without raw_interfaces_only attribute, Visual C++ will generate wrapper functions for these raw interfaces for simplicity. Either way is correct if you use the functions properly. Here is a C++ example code snippet of GetErrorTerm without raw_interfaces_only attribute: 288

289 #include <atlbase.h> #include <atlcom.h> #include <atlsafe.h> // _variant_t data; data = pnvna->geterrorterm(bstr_t("e01_p1")); // Create a COM wrapper of the 2 dimensional safe array CComSafeArray<double> *pcsa = new CComSafeArray<double>(data.parray); long lindex = 0; long lubound; // array indexes LONG aindex[2]; // Get the bound of the array of error terms. lubound = pcsa->getupperbound(0); // Retrieve the real and imaginary part of the error terms double *preal = new double[lubound + 1], *pimag = new double[lubound + 1]; // 0 to lubound for (lindex = 0; lindex <= lubound; lindex++) { preal[lindex]); pimag[lindex]); processing } // aindex[0] = lindex; aindex[1] = 0; HRESULT hr = pcsa->multidimgetat(aindex, ATLASSERT(hr == S_OK); aindex[1] = 1; hr = pcsa->multidimgetat(aindex, ATLASSERT(hr == S_OK); // don t forget to delete pcsa, preal & pimag after data 289

290 NVNA Object Model Application Object - Main object for NVNA system and measurements. See Also: MeasurementConfiguration Object - Controls Multitone and Mixer measurements. PulseGenerator Object - Controls properties of the NVNA Pulse Generators. Getting Started with COM/DCOM C+ Example C# Example (download.zip file) Last Modified: 14-Mar Jun Sep-2010 Added C# example Added PulseGen object New Object 5-Feb-2009 Added new commands (1.2) 3-Apr-2008 New topic 290

291 File Save and Recall Instrument State and ALL Calibration Data Save Data *.csv Files *.mdf / *.mdif Files Save Plot Areas as Images Instrument states and Calibration data Save and Recall data dialog box help NVNA files are saved and recalled as *.ncm files which save Instrument states and ALL Calibration data. This is analogous to a PNA-X *.csa file. Click File, then Save to save the Instrument State and Calibration data as a *.ncm file. Click File, then Recall to open an existing *.ncm file. All settings and data are saved in EXACTLY the state it was in when saved, including the application of settings and the displayed measurement data. Calibration data is saved only if the current measurement is being corrected. Learn more. 291

292 Save in / Look in Allows you to navigate to the directory where you want to save the file. File name Displays the filename that you either typed in or clicked on in the directory contents box. Type.ncm is the only choice. Save / Open Saves or recalls the file. Save Data As.. Both the Save As and Save Data As menu selections can save both *.mdf and *.csv files. See *.mdf files save *.csv Files - Comma-Separated Values *.csv files are read by spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel. They contain header information and the following data for EACH displayed trace: Stimulus data point Real and Imaginary data pairs CSV file in Microsoft Excel. To save *.csv files: 1. Click File, then Save Data As 2. Under Save as type, select CSV Formatted Data 3. Select output format. Choose from: LogMag & Angle (degrees) (Linear) Magnitude & Angle (degrees) Real & Imaginary (Learn more) Displayed format *.mdf / *.mdif Files 292

293 MDF files are compatible with Keysight ADS (Advanced Design System). *.mdf files contain: header information and the following space-separated data for EACH displayed trace: To save *.mdf files: Stimulus data Real and Imaginary data pair for each selected parameter. The type of data that is available depends on the current measured data. For example, X- parameter data will not be available if an X-parameter measurement was not performed. You can specify the data to save in two ways: 1. Click Save Data As, then click the data of interest. 2. Click Define Data Save to start the following dialog: Define Data Save dialog box help 1. Specify the data to be saved to MDIF files. Waves / or S-parameters if enabled Voltages (*.mdf, *.mdif) Currents (*.mdf, *.mdif) X-parameters - (*.xnp) used with the latest ADS X-measurements (*.mdf, *.mdif) PHD File - (*.mdf, *.mdif) Normalized X-Parameters for ADS 2008 only 2. Then click OK. 3. Click Save Data As 4. Click All Selected Domain Data. 293

294 MDF file for Multitone data in text editor. Save Plot Areas as Images You can save any of the plots as image files. 1. Right-click on a plot, then click Window Capture, then Copy to copy the plot image to another program or Save to save the image to a file. 2. If Copy was selected, open an external program such as Microsoft paint. Then Paste the image into the program and edit the image if desired. 3. Save the image. Last Modified: 11-Sep Jun Nov Apr-2008 Updated define dialog Added Save Data As Added window capture New topic 294

295 295

296 Using NVNA with ATS NVNA Option 520 (N524xA) S94520A (N524xB) extends the X-parameter measurement capability to include the reflected wave at the fundamental frequency at port 2 in the large signal operating point. This eliminates the assumption that it is a small signal, and enables characterization of components under highly mismatched conditions with high levels of accuracy even under heavy compression. The large signal at the fundamental frequency at port 2 is achieved by inserting a tuner into the measurement setup. See Block Diagram. The load selection and tuner control is handled by Maury s ATS software, which runs directly on the PNA-X. ATS version 5.1 or higher is required. In this topic: Benefits Setup and Configuration Calibration Making Measurements See Also App Note: Load Pull with X-Parameters Produces Instant Large Signal Models Load-Pull + NVNA = Enhanced X-Parameters for PA Designs with High Mismatch and Technology-Independent Large-Signal Device Models Benefits When the Maury ATS is combined with the NVNA in a load pull setup, the following measurements can be made: 1. Vector measurements of the incident and reflected waves at the source and load ports at the fundamental and harmonic frequencies. This is very comprehensive measurement which includes the following data: Delivered output power Available input power Delivered input power Am/pm conversion Time domain waveforms 2. X-Parameter measurements, which are a major industry breakthrough when used with the Maury ATS load pull system. Load-dependent x-parameters are unique to the combination of the Keysight NVNA with the Maury load pull system. 296

297 The measurement creates a file which can be used directly as a PHD large signal device model in the non-linear ADS simulator. The PHD model is extremely accurate since it is based directly on the load pull measurement. With other large signal models, load pull data is often used as the reference for checking model accuracy, since most analytical or compact models are developed from small signal and bias data, and extrapolated to large signal operation. The PHD model uses the reference load pull data directly. A sweep plan measurement can include power, bias, gamma and frequency. This will produce a comprehensive PHD model that can be used to simulate and design complex power amplifiers, such as multi-stage or Doherty amplifiers. The PHD model is a black box model, so is also independent of the device technology (such as GaAs or GaN, for example), and can be shared without showing any proprietary device details. Setup and Configuration The following configuration information provides a high level overview. Refer to Maury ATS information for detailed procedures: 1. Install Software Install the ATS software onto the PNA-X / NVNA. This may require an external CD drive or a mapped drive to an external PC. Learn how to map a drive. (Link goes to PNA-X Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) Start the ATS software and select nvna.cfg as the configuration file. This will setup all the recommended options, so usually the only thing left is to configure the tuners and bias instruments. Note: The original nvna.cfg is included as a template to simplify the setup, so save the config file into a new name before starting to customize it. Block diagram of a typical load pull setup with the Keysight NVNA. 297

298 The NVNA X-parameter measurements are controlled using the Maury LSNA block diagram components. Note: To switch between the NVNA and ATS apps, Minimize either application to see the PNA-X desktop. From there, either application can be launched. Alt + tab can also be used from a keyboard connected to the PNA. 2. Setup NI compatibility The PNA-X must be configured to run the ATS GPIB drivers. Note: The following procedure reflects the terminology used in Keysight IO Libraries Suite 14. Later versions use similar, but not identical terminology. In the PNA-X 1. Click File, then Minimize Application 2. On the PNA-X desktop, click Start then Programs then Keysight IO Libraries Suite then Keysight Connection Expert 3. Select Tools then Options then Keysight 488 Options 4. Check Use the Keysight 488 Library where possible then click OK 5. Right-click GPIB0 then select Change Properties 6. Click Keysight 488 Properties and note the GPIB board number. This is the address of the GPIB board to use in the ATS software. The factory default is 10(GPIB10). 7. Click OK to close each ACE dialog. In the ATS software 1. From the main block diagram menu, select Setup Instruments 2. Click GPIB Board. 3. Check GPIB and type the address of the GPIB board from above step Setup the Maury Tuners Set up the correct driver for each tuner: For USB tuners, connect them using the USB connectors on the PNA-X For tuners using a GPIB controller, connect them using the GPIB connector on the rear panel of the PNA-X. 4. Setup the Bias Normally, the ATS software should control the bias supplies, and the NVNA should read the bias in order to get the most accurate X-parameters. The ATS software will then read the bias from the NVNA. 1. In the NVNA, click Utility, then External Instruments, then GPIB Instrument Control. 2. In the ATS software, set up the bias supplies as normal. 298

299 3. To read the bias from the NVNA, use the voltmeter driver vmnvnacom.dll and the current meter driver imnvnacom.dll. Calibration 1. Start the ATS software, and initialize the tuners to ensure that they are in the Z0 position. 2. In the NVNA App a. Set the desired fundamental frequency range and the number of harmonics. b. Set the start and stop power to be equal (1 power point). c. Set the start and stop bias to be equal (1 bias point). d. Click Apply e. Calibrate the NVNA. 3. In the ATS software, click the LSNA icon, and select the reference plane that matches the actual NVNA cal. This is required for the ATS to correctly de-embed the measurements as the tuners move to different impedances. The choices are: 1. DUT this means that the NVNA cal was at the intended DUT planes 2. Tuner this means that the fixture was removed for the NVNA cal, so the reference planes are at the tuner plane that will be next to the fixture 3. Test Port this means that the NVNA calibration planes are outside of the calibrated tuning blocks. 4. Connect a THRU standard at the DUT reference planes, and do a CW power calibration. Making Measurements 1. In the ATS software, select Measurements ->CW, or click the CW button on the toolbar. This will launch the interactive power measurement screen. 2. To measure X-Parameters, select Setup then Select Measurement Parameters then double-click X-Params to highlight it. If a measurement with NO X- parameters is desired, double-click to un-highlight X-Params. Note: Time domain measurements will be made even if X-Params is not selected. 299

300 3. The available measurements include single point, load pull, source pull, power sweeps, bias sweeps, and the sweep plan. The sweep plan measurement is the most comprehensive, and is generally suggested for creating a PHD model file. Up to 7 variables are allowed, including power, bias, gamma (source or load), and frequency variables. 4. Time domain data will be saved in any measured data file. 5. If selected, X-parameter data is saved in a separate file, adding the suffix _PHD to the specified base filename and using the extension.mdf. Learn more. Last Modified: 5-Feb-2009 New topic 300

301 NVNA Measurement Order NVNA can potentially have many different stimulus conditions at which response signals will be measured. The following shows the order in which the stimulus conditions are setup in General, Multitone, and Mixer measurement classes: Swept variables: <1, 2, and so forth> RF frequency sweep: <fundamental 1, fundamental 2, and so forth> RF power sweep: <source 1, source 2, and so forth> For example, given a measurement setup with 2 swept variables, 2 fundamentals, and 2 source power settings, the following describes the order in which the stimulus conditions are setup: 1. Var_1, Fund_1, SrcPwr_1 2. Var_1, Fund_1, SrcPwr_2 3. Var_1, Fund_2, SrcPwr_1 4. Var_1, Fund_2, SrcPwr_2 5. Var_2, Fund_1, SrcPwr_1 6. Var_2, Fund_1, SrcPwr_2 7. Var_2, Fund_2, SrcPwr_1 8. Var_2, Fund_2, SrcPwr_2 General measurement class There are no swept variables by default. They can be manually setup as DC voltage (VDC_1, VDC_2 ) or other variables, such as GX_2_1, GY_2_1 in X-parameter measurements by Maury system. For frequency and power sweep, there is only one fundamental for frequency settings and one source for source power settings. With multiple segments, the loop order is: RF frequency sweep RF power sweep Multitone measurement class 2-port: by default there are two swept variables 1. centerfreq 2. freqspacing 3-port is the same as Mixer measurement class below. 301

302 Mixer measurement class There are no swept variables by default. When Offset for LO or Input frequency setting is selected, swept variable input_freq or LO_freq is added automatically and the sweep type of Input/LO frequency settings change to coupled. 302

303 Addenda 303

304 Envelope Hardware Configuration Envelope measurements can be configured in three ways. Your choice depends on whether you plan to perform X-parameter extraction, whether you have an external source available, and the measurement frequencies of interest. For X-parameter measurements, the phase reference must be driven by an external source or the PNA-X 10 MHz reference generator. Learn how to perform X-parameter extraction. The following connections are made for ALL configurations: 1. Connect power meter, external source (optional), to the PNA-X GPIB Controller connector. (Link goes to PNA Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) A USB power meter may also be used. See also Configure GPIB Instruments 2. Connect both the Calibration and Measurement Phase References to the PNA-X USB. Learn more about the Phase Reference Setup. See Also PNA-X Block Diagrams Configuration Diagrams You 'tell' the NVNA your configuration choice at the Measurement Configuration dialog by selecting the Hardware Setup and Reference Source. Config# Click to view diagram Input Sourc e Phas e Ref. Sourc e X- Para ms PNA Switch Settings* See PNA- X Path Configurat or href="envelope_hardware_configuration.htm#co nfig1">1 Int 10 MHz No Port1 Ref. Switch = External 2 Int Ext No Port1 Ref. Switch = External 3 Int Int No Port1 Ref. Switch = External Configuration 1 - Internal Source, Internal 10 MHz Phase Reference 304

305 Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) 4 REF 1 Source OUT Splitter IN DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 RCVR D IN (Port 4) User supplied This connection allows receiver D to be used as the Port 1 reference receiver so that both pulsed stimulus signals can be measured simultaneously. 5 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 305

306 6 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 7 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration2 - Internal Source, External Phase Reference Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) Splitter IN DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 User supplied 306

307 4 REF 1 Source OUT RCVR D IN (Port 4) This connection allows receiver D to be used as the Port 1 reference receiver so that both pulsed stimulus signals can be measured simultaneously. 5 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 6 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 7 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 3 - Internal Source, Internal Phase Reference Callout Sequence From To Notes 307

308 1 PNA-X Test Port 1 2 DUT OUT (Port 2) 3 PNA-X Test Port 3 4 Measurement Phase Reference OUT 5 PNA-X Test Port 4 6 REF 1 Source OUT Last Modified: DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 2 Measurement Phase Reference IN RCVR C IN (Port 3) Calibration Phase Reference IN RCVR D IN (Port 4) Remove jumper loop This connection allows receiver D to be used as the Port 1 reference receiver so that both pulsed stimulus signals can be measured simultaneously. 18-Aug-2010 New topic 308

309 General Hardware Configuration General measurements can be configured in several ways. Your choice depends on whether you plan to perform X-parameter extraction, whether you have an external source available, whether Isolation is a consideration, and the measurement frequencies of interest. For X-parameter measurements, the phase reference must be driven by an external source or the PNA-X 10 MHz Reference output. Learn how to perform X-parameter extraction The following connections are made for ALL configurations: 1. Connect power meter, external source (optional), to the PNA-X GPIB Controller connector. (Link goes to PNA Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) A USB power meter may also be used. See also Configure GPIB Instruments 2. Connect both the Calibration and Measurement Phase References to the PNA-X USB. Learn more about the Phase Reference Setup. Configuration Diagrams You 'tell' the NVNA your configuration choice at the Measurement Configuration dialog by selecting the Hardware Setup and Reference Source. Config# Click to view diagram Input Source Phase Referen ce Source X- Para ms PNA Switch Settings* See PNA- X Path Configura tor href="general_hardware_configuration.htm#c onfig1">1 Int 10 MHz Yes No Change to Default 2 Int Ext Yes No Change to Default 3 Int Int No No Change to Default 4 High Isolati on 10 MHz Yes Port 1 reference Mixer switch set 309

310 to External 5 High Isolati on 6 High Isolati on Ext Yes Port 1 reference Mixer switch set to External Int No Port 1 reference Mixer switch set to External See the General Measurement Configuration dialog. Configuration 1 Hardware Setup = Internal Source Reference = 10 MHz 310

311 X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) Splitter IN DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 User supplied 4 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 5 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 311

312 6 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 2 Hardware Setup = Internal Reference = External Source X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 312

313 4 External source RF OUT Splitter IN User supplied 5 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 6 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 7 Measurement Phase Reference OUT RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 3 Hardware Setup = Internal Reference = Internal Source X-Parameters NOT available Callout Sequence From To Notes 313

314 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 DUT OUT (Port 2) PNA-X Test Port 4 5 PNA-X Test Port 3 6 Measurement Phase Reference OUT DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 2 Calibration Phase Reference IN Measurement Phase Reference IN RCVR C IN (Port 3) Remove jumper loop Configuration 4 Hardware Setup = High Isolation Reference = 10 MHz The numbered connections in this setup are REQUIRED. Isolation is provided by using the D Receiver as the DUT input reference receiver (Items 7, 8, 9). This setup removes all leakage through the R1 reference receiver switch. The remainder of this configuration, including the use of external components, is an example of how a typical hi-power measurement could be configured. Select and use these components as appropriate for your measurement setup. For example, if protecting the internal components from being overpowered is not an issue, the DUT output can be connected directly to port

315 X-Parameters available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Test Port 1 2 DUT OUT (Port 2) 3 PNA-X 10 MHz OUT DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN Through optional external components and jumper cables User supplied 4 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 5 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 315

316 6 Measurement Phase Reference OUT 7 Port 1 SOURCE OUT 8 External Coupler Thru-Arm Output 9 External Coupler Coupled Arm / Attenuator RCVR B IN (Port 2) Booster Amp Input / External Coupler Input Port 1 CPLR THRU Port 4 RCVR D IN Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Configuration 5 Hardware Setup = High Isolation Reference = External Source The numbered connections in this setup are REQUIRED. Isolation is provided by using the D Receiver as the DUT input reference receiver (Items 8, 9, 10). This setup removes all leakage through the R1 reference receiver switch. The remainder of this configuration, including the use of external components, is an example of how a typical hi-power measurement could be configured. Select and use these components as appropriate for your measurement setup. For example, if protecting the internal components from being overpowered is not an issue, the DUT output can be connected directly to port

317 X-Parameters available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Test Port 1 2 DUT OUT (Port 2) 3 External source 10 MHz OUT 4 External source RF OUT DUT Input (Port 1) PNA-X Test Port 3 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN Splitter IN Through optional external components and jumper cables User supplied 5 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 6 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 317

318 7 Measurement Phase Reference OUT 8 Port 1 SOURCE OUT 9 External Coupler Thru-Arm Output 10 External Coupler Coupled Arm / Attenuator RCVR B IN (Port 2) Booster Amp Input / External Coupler Input Port 1 CPLR THRU Port 4 RCVR D IN Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Configuration 6 Hardware Setup = High Isolation Reference = Internal Source The numbered connections in this setup are REQUIRED. Isolation is provided by using the D Receiver as the DUT input reference receiver (Items 6, 7, 8). This setup removes all leakage through the R1 reference receiver switch. The remainder of this configuration, including the use of external components, is an example of how a typical hi-power measurement could be configured. Select and use these components as appropriate for your measurement setup. For example, if protecting the internal components from being overpowered is not an issue, the DUT output can be connected directly to port

319 X-Parameters NOT available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Test Port 1 2 DUT OUT (Port 2) 3 PNA-X Test Port 4 4 PNA-X Test Port 3 5 Measurement Phase Reference OUT DUT Input (Port 1) Port 2 using frontpanel jumper connections. Calibration Phase Reference IN Measurement Phase Reference IN RCVR C IN (Port 3) Remove jumper loop 319

320 6 Port 1 SOURCE OUT 7 External Coupler Thru-Arm Output 8 External Coupler Coupled Arm / Attenuator Last Modified: Booster Amp Input / External Coupler Input Port 1 CPLR THRU Port 4 RCVR D IN Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop 16-Apr Aug-2010 Added Hi Isolation configs New topic 320

321 Mixer Hardware Configuration Note: PNA Option 083 (N524xA) S93083A (N524xB) (FCA Mixer/Converter measurements) is required for this measurement class. For X-parameter measurements, the phase reference must be driven by an external source or the PNA-X 10 MHz reference generator. Learn how to perform X-parameter extraction. The following connections are made for ALL configurations: 1. Connect power meter, external source (optional), to the PNA-X GPIB Controller connector. (Link goes to PNA Help - click Back to return to NVNA Help.) A USB power meter may also be used. See also Configure GPIB Instruments 2. Connect both the Calibration and Measurement Phase References to the PNA-X USB. Learn more about the Phase Reference Setup. See Also PNA-X Block Diagrams Configuration Diagrams You 'tell' NVNA your configuration choice at the Measurement Configuration dialog by selecting the Hardware Setup and Reference Source. Customize automatically appears when you have made Hardware configuration selections that renders one of the standard Hardware Configurations invalid. You are then responsible for making switch settings in the See PNA-X Path Configurator to route signals to the correct ports. When Hardware Setup is set to Customize X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Pulse measurements must be made with the receiver path set to Wide. Only CW measurements should use the narrow receiver path. To set the receiver path, click Response, then Receiver Path. Config# Click to scroll down to diagram Inp ut So urc e LO So urc e Ph as e Re f. So urc e X- Par am s PNA Switch Settings* href="javascript:void(0);" id="a1" style="font-weight: normal;" onmouseover="= 4 && typeof(bspspopuponmouseov er) == 'function') BSPSPopupOnMouseOver(even t);" class="bsscpopup" onclick="bsscpopup('source_ Out1_Low_Band_Mode.htm');r 321

322 eturn false;">see PNA-X Path Configurator href="mixer_hardware_ Configuration.htm#Mixer 1">1 Ext Int Int No Port1 Bypass = Combiner 2 Int Ext Int No Port2 Bypass = Rear Panel 3 Ext Int Ext Ye s Port1 Bypass = Combiner Port2 Bypass = Rear Panel Port4 Bypass = Rear Panel 4 Int Ext Ext Ye s Port4 Bypass = Rear Panel 5 Int Int Ext No No Change to Default 6 Int Int 10 MH z 7 Int Ext 10 MH z 8 Ext Int 10 MH z No Ye s Ye s No Change to Default Port4 Bypass = Rear Panel Port1 Bypass = Combiner Port2 Bypass = Rear Panel Port4 Bypass = Rear Panel * PNA-X switch settings are deviations from the default configuration. Configuration 1 - External Source to DUT Input Internal Source to DUT LO Internal Source to Phase Ref 322

323 X-Parameters NOT available Note: When Hardware Setup is set to Customize, then X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 External source RF OUT 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 PNA-X Test Port 2 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 1 COMB IN (J10) DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) PNA-X Test Port 4 Remove jumper loop 323

324 6 PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN User supplied 7 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 8 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 9 Measurement Phase Reference OUT Configuration 2 RCVR C IN (Port 3) Remove jumper loop Internal Source to DUT Input External Source to DUT LO Internal Source to Phase Ref X-Parameters NOT available Note: When Hardware Setup is set to Customize, then X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. 324

325 Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 External source RF OUT 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 PNA-X Test Port 2 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) 6 PNA-X Test Port 3 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 2 SW TSet IN (J1) DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) PNA-X Test Port 4 Splitter IN Remove jumper loop User supplied 7 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 8 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 9 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. Configuration 3 RCVR C IN (Port 3) Remove jumper loop External Source to DUT Input Internal Source to DUT LO External Source to Phase Ref 325

326 X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source #1 10 MHz OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN (Connected with Tee) 2 External source #1 10 MHz OUT (Connected with Tee) 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 PNA-X Test Port 4 External source #2 10 MHz IN DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) All instruments connected to the same 10 MHz reference. 326

327 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) 6 External source #2 RF OUT PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN Supplied by customer 7 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 8 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 9 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. 10 External source #1 RF OUT 11 PNA-X Rear Panel Port 2 SW SRC OUT (J2) 12 Directional Coupler Thru arm IN 13 PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW SRC OUT (J4) RCVR B IN (Port 2) PNA-X Rear Panel Port 1 COMB IN (J10) Directional Coupler - IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW TSET IN (J3) Directional Coupler - Coupled arm IN Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Supplied by customer Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Configuration 4 Internal Source to DUT Input External Source to DUT LO External Source to Phase Ref 327

328 X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source #1 10 MHz OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN (Connected with Tee) 2 External source #1 10 MHz OUT External source #2 10 MHz IN (Connected with Tee) 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 PNA-X Test Port 4 DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) 328

329 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) 6 External source #2 RF OUT PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN Supplied by customer 7 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 8 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 9 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. 10 External source #1 RF OUT 11 PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW SRC OUT (J4) 12 Directional Coupler - Thru arm Configuration 5 RCVR B IN (Port 2) Directional Coupler IN Directional Coupler - Coupled arm IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW TSET IN (J3) Remove jumper loop Supplied by customer Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop Internal Source to DUT Input Internal Source to DUT LO External Source to Phase Ref 329

330 X-Parameters NOT available Note: When Hardware Setup is set to Customize, then X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 PNA-X Test Port 4 4 DUT OUT (Port 2) 5 External source RF OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) PNA-X Test Port 3 Splitter IN Supplied by customer 6 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 330

331 7 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 8 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. Configuration 6 RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Internal Source to DUT Input Internal Source to DUT LO PNA-X 10 MHz to Phase Ref X-Parameters NOT available Note: When Hardware Setup is set to Customize, then X-Parameters are always available, but it is YOUR responsibility to ensure that the custom setup applies extraction tones at all ports. Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT Splitter IN Supplied by customer 331

332 2 PNA-X Test Port 1 3 PNA-X Test Port 4 4 DUT OUT (Port 2) DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) PNA-X Test Port 3 5 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 6 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 7 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. Configuration 7 RCVR B IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Internal Source to DUT Input External Source to DUT LO PNA-X 10 MHz to Phase Ref 332

333 X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 PNA-X Test Port 4 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) 6 External source RF OUT 7 PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW SRC OUT (J4) 8 Directional Coupler - Thru arm OUT PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN Splitter IN DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) PNA-X Test Port 3 Directional Coupler IN Directional Coupler - Coupled arm IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW TSET IN (J3) Supplied by customer Supplied by customer Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop 9 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 10 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN 11 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. RCVR C IN (Port 2) Remove jumper loop Configuration 8 External Source to DUT Input 333

334 Internal Source to DUT LO PNA-X 10 MHz to Phase Ref X-Parameters ARE available Callout Sequence From To Notes 1 External source 10 MHz OUT 2 PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref OUT 3 PNA-X Test Port 1 4 PNA-X Test Port 4 5 DUT OUT (Port 2) PNA-X Rear Panel 10 MHz Ref IN Splitter IN DUT Input (Port 1) DUT LO (Port 3) PNA-X Test Port 3 Supplied by customer 334

335 6 PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW SRC OUT (J2) 7 PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW SRC OUT (J4) 8 Directional Coupler Thru arm OUT 9 External source RF OUT Directional Coupler Thru arm IN Directional Coupler - Coupled arm IN PNA-X Rear Panel Port 4 SW TSET IN (J3) PNA-X Rear Panel Port 1 COMB IN (J10) Supplied by customer Remove jumper loop Remove jumper loop 10 Splitter OUT Calibration Phase Reference IN 11 Splitter OUT Measurement Phase Reference IN Remove jumper loop 12 Measurement Phase Reference OUT. RCVR B IN (Port 2) Last Modified: 11-Feb Aug-2010 Added PNA option required New topic 335

336 Procedures Setup Multitone Measurement using External Multitone Source 1. Setup Multitone Measurement using Internal Sources 336

337 AddSegment Method DescriptionAdds a segment to segment table and allows you to make segment settings. This command is different from SetSegment Method which only allows settings to an existing row. The following settings can be made individually to an existing segment: SetIFBW Method SetPower Method (sets all power parameters) VB Syntaxrow = app.addsegment(startfreq, stopfreq, numfreq, startpower, stoppower, numpowers, powersweepdomain, numharmonics, IFBW) Variable(Type) - Description row (long) Variable to store the returned index of the row added in segment table. app startfreq stopfreq numfreq startpower stoppower numpowers An Application (object) (double) the value of start frequency (double) the value of stop frequency (long) the number of frequency points (double) the value of start power (double) the value of stop power (long) the number of power points powersweepdomain (long) power sweep domain. Choose from: 0 - dbm 1 - Volts numharmonics IFBW (long) the number of maximum harmonics. (double) the value of IF Bandwidth DefaultNot Applicable Examples row = app.addsegment 1e9, 2e9, 3, -5, 5, 3, 0, 5,

338 C++ Syntax HRESULT AddSegment(double startfreq, double stopfreq, int numfreq, double startpower, double stoppower, int numpowers, int powersweepdomain, int numharmonics, double IFBW, int * prow) InterfaceIApplication 338

339 Application Object Description Contains the methods and properties that control the NVNA Application Accessing the Application object Dim app As AgilentNVNA.Application See Also MeasurementConfiguration_Object C++ Example Commands AddSegment Method ApplySetup Method Attenuator Property AttenuatorMode Property CalPower Property CoupledSegmentsEnabled Property DeembedEnabled Property DeembedInterpolated Property Domain Property EnvGateDelay Property EnvGateWidth Property EnvIFBW Property EnvNumHarmonics Property Description Adds a segment to segment table. Applies the measurement settings. Gets or sets the value of the source attenuator. Gets or sets the mode of operation of the attenuator control. Gets or sets the calibration power level. Sets or reads the state of coupled segments. Sets or reads the state of fixture de-embedding. Sets or reads the state of de-embedding interpolation. Sets or reads the domain. Gets or sets the gate delay in envelope domain. Gets or sets the gate width in envelope domain. Gets or sets the IFBW in envelope domain. Gets or sets the number of harmonics in envelope domain. 339

340 EnvPRF Property EnvPulseDelay Property EnvPulseWidth Property Gets or sets the pulse repetition frequency in envelope domain. Gets or sets the source pulse delay in envelope domain. Gets or sets the source pulse width in envelope domain. EnvSourceFreq PropertyGets or sets the source frequency in envelope domain. EnvSourcePower PropertyGets or sets the source power in envelope domain. EnvTimeStart Property EnvTimeStep Property EnvTimeStop Property GenerateXParamFromFiles Method GetEnvComplex Method GetEnvData Method GetErrorTerm Method GetErrorTermFreqSet Method GetExtMeasData Method GetFreqSet Method GetGenData Method GetHarmonicsNum Method GetIFBW Method GetMultitoneData Method GetMultitoneData2 Method Gets or sets the start time in envelope domain. Gets or sets the step time in envelope domain. Gets or sets the stop time in envelope domain. Generates X-parameters from measured data files. Retrieves complex envelope domain data. Retrieves complex envelope domain data Reads the calibration error terms Reads the frequency set with which the error terms correspond. Retrieves measured swept variable values. Retrieves frequency set in general domain. Retrieves general domain data. Gets the number of harmonics for a fundamental frequency in general domain. Reads the IF Bandwidth value in a segment table. Retrieves multitone domain data by sweep index. Retrieves multitone domain data by variable values. 340

341 GetNumFreq Method GetNumHarmonics Method GetNumPowers Method GetPowerSet Method GetPowerSweepDomain Method GetStartFreq Method GetStartPower Method GetStopFreq Method GetStopPower Method GetXparameter Method IDString Property IsCalValid Method LaunchCalWizard Method LimitMeasurementBandwidth Method Measure Method MeasureAsync Method MeasureAsyncCancel Method Reads the number of frequency points in a segment table. Reads the maximum number of Harmonic in a segment table. Reads the number of Power points in a segment table. Retrieves power set in general domain. Reads the power sweep domain in a segment table. Reads the start frequency value in a segment table. Reads the start power value in a segment table. Reads the stop frequency value in a segment table. Reads the stop power value in a segment table. Retrieves X-parameter data. Returns the ID of the NVNA, including the Model number, Serial Number, and the Software revision number. Reads if there is a valid NVNA cal Launches the NVNA Cal Wizard. Limits the measurement bandwith. Trigger a synchronous measurement and return when complete. Trigger a measurement (asynchronously) and return immediately Cancel an asynchronous measurement 341

342 MeasureCompleted Event MeasureIsCompleted Property MeasurementConfiguration Method PathConfiguration Property PhaseSourceEnabled Property PortsPowerOff Method Preset Method Signals the completion of asynchronous measurement Returns an indication whether the asynchronous measurement has completed. Returns the MeasurementConfiguration object. Sets or reads the specified path configuration element setting. Sets or reads the state of phase source enabling. Turns off measurement port powers. Resets the NVNA to factory defined default settings. PulseGenerator Method PutErrorTerm Method Quit Event Quit Method Recall Method ReceiverAttenuator Property ReferenceImpedance Property RemoveSegment Method RemoveSweptVariable Method Save Method SavePHDFile Method SaveXMeas Method SaveXparameter Method Sets the calibration error terms. Triggered by exiting the NVNA. Terminates NVNA. Recalls a measurement and calibration state. Gets or sets the value of the receiver attenuation. Sets or reads the reference impedance. Removes a segment from the segment table. Removes swept variable. Saves the measurement and calibration state. Exports files in PHD MDIF format. Saves X-parameter measurements. Exports X-parameters to an xnp file. 342

343 SetALCMode Method SetDeembed Method SetETHarmonics Method SetETLevel Method SetETPhases Method SetIFBW Method SetPhaseSource Method SetPower Method SetSegment Method SetSweptVariable Method Show Method SourceOn Property SourcePower Property SparameterEnabled Property Visible Property XparameterEnabled Property Sets the leveling mode for all sources. Sets the files to be de-embedded. Sets the maximum number of ET harmonics. Sets ET level. Sets the number of ET phases Sets the IFBW data in segment table. Configures the phase reference source. Sets the power sweep data in a segment table. Sets segment data in a segment table. Adds or sets the value of a swept variable (included in output file). Shows the main NVNA window. Turn ON and OFF the specified source. Set the source power level of the specified source. Sets or reads the state of S-parameter enabling. Makes the NVNA visible or not visible. Sets or reads the state of X-parameter enabling. Last Modified: 12-May-2017 New topic 343

344 ApplySetup Method DescriptionApplies the measurement settings. VB Syntaxapp.ApplySetup () Variable(Type) - Description app An Application object DefaultNot Applicable Examples app.applysetup C++ Syntax HRESULT ApplySetup() InterfaceIApplication Last Modified: 2-Dec-2010 New topic 344

345 Attenuator Property Description Gets or sets the value of the source attenuator for the specified port number. Sending this command automatically sets AttenuatorMode to Manual. VB Syntaxapp.Attenuator (portnum) = value Variable (Type) - Description app portnum value Default0 An Application (object) (Long) Logical port number for which attenuator is to be set. Choose from 1, 2, or 3. (Double) Attenuator value. The range of settable values depends on the PNA. If an invalid attenuation setting is entered, the next lower valid value is selected. For example, if 19 is entered, then 15 db attenuation will be selected. Examples app.attenuator(2)-5 'Write value = app.attenuator(2) 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_attenuator (long port, double * dvalue) HRESULT put_attenuator (long port, double dvalue) Interface IApplication 345

346 AttenuatorMode Property Description Gets or sets the mode of operation of the attenuator control for the specified port number. VB Syntaxapp.AttenuatorMode (portnum) = value Variable(Type) - Description app portnum An Application (object) (Long) Logical port number for which attenuator is to be set. Choose from 1, 2, 3, 4. value (Enum) Attenuator Mode. Choose from: 0 - ATTENUATOR_AUTO - Attenuation value is set automatically. 1 - ATTENUATOR_MANUAL - Set attenuation value using Attenuator Property Default1 - ATTENUATOR_MANUAL Examples app.attenuatormode(2) = ATTENUATOR_AUTO 'Write value = app.attenuatormode(2) 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_attenuatormode(long port, tagnamodes* pval) HRESULT put_attenuatormode(long port, tagnamodes newval) Interface IApplication 346

347 CalPower Property Description Gets or sets the calibration power level for the specified port number. Learn about Cal Power. VB Syntaxapp.CalPower (portnum) = value Variable (Type) - Description app portnum value An Application (object) (Long) Logical port number for which cal power is to be set. Choose from 1, 2, 3 (Double) RF power in dbm. Choose a value within the range of the PNA. Default-5 dbm Examples app.calpower(2) = 0 'Write value = app.calpower(2) 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_calpower(long port, double *pval) HRESULT put_calpower(long port, newval) Interface IApplication 347

348 CoupledSegmentsEnabled Property Description Sets or reads the state of coupled segments. Note: This property cannot be changed or enabled if S-parameters are enabled, or X-parameter is enabled, or working in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.CoupledSegmentsEnabled = value Variable (Type) - Description app An Application (object) value (boolean) False - coupled segments NOT enabled True - coupled segments are enabled Default 0 - False Examples app.coupledsegmentsenabled = True 'Write state = app.coupledsegmentsenabled 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_coupledsegmentsenabled (VARIANT_BOOL * benabled) HRESULT put_coupledsegmentsenabled (VARIANT_BOOL benabled) Interface IApplication 348

349 DeembedEnabled Property Description Sets or reads the state of fixture de-embedding.. Note: De-embedding cannot be enabled if the de-embed files are not setup successfully. Learn more. VB Syntaxapp.DeembedEnabled = value Variable (Type) - Description app An Application (object) value (boolean) False - De-embedding NOT enabled True - De-embedding is enabled Default 0 - False Examples app.deembedenabled = True 'Write state = app.deembedenabled 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_deembedenabled (VARIANT_BOOL * benabled) HRESULT put_deembedenabled (VARIANT_BOOL benabled) Interface IApplication 349

350 DeembedInterpolated Property Description Sets or reads the state of de-embedding interpolation. Learn more. VB Syntaxapp.DeembedInterpolated = value Variable (Type) - Description app An Application (object) value (boolean) False - De-embedding NOT interpolated. True - De-embedding is interpolated. Default 1 - True Examples app.deembedinterpolated = True 'Write state = app.deembedinterpolated 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_deembedinterpolated (VARIANT_BOOL * benabled) HRESULT put_deembedinterpolated (VARIANT_BOOL benabled) Interface IApplication 350

351 Domain Property Description Sets or read the domain. VB Syntaxapp.Domain = value Variable (Type) - Description app An Application (object) value (Enum) 0 - Domain_General 1 - Domain_Envelope 2 - Domain_Multitone To configure a Mixer measurement, select Multitone domain, then use the Multitone commands. Default 0 - Domain_General Examples app.domain = Domain_General 'Write value = app.domain 'Read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_domain(enum Domain * domain) HRESULT put_domain(enum Domain domain) Interface IApplication Last Modified: 14-Oct Apr-2008 Added multitone New topic 351

352 EnvGateDelay Property DescriptionGets or sets the gate delay in envelope domain. VB Syntax app.envgatedelay = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the gate delay. Default100 usec Examples Nvna.EnvGateDelay = 50e-6 'Write value = Nvna.EnvGateDelay 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envgatedelay(double* pval) HRESULT put_envgatedelay(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 352

353 EnvGateWidth Property DescriptionGets or sets the gate width in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvGateWidth = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the gate width. Default1 usec Examples Nvna.EnvGateWidth = 2e-6 'Write value = Nvna.EnvGateWidth 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envgatewidth(double* pval) HRESULT put_envgatewidth(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 353

354 EnvIFBW Property DescriptionGets or sets the IFBW in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvIFBW = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the IFBW. Default500 Hz Examples Nvna.EnvIFBW = 30 'Write value = Nvna.EnvIFBW 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envifbw(double* pval) HRESULT put_envifbw(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 354

355 EnvNumHarmonics Property DescriptionGets or sets the number of harmonics in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvNumHarmonics = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the number of harmonics. Default5 Examples Nvna.EnvNumHarmonics = 3 'Write value = Nvna.EnvNumHarmonics 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envnumharmonics(double* pval) HRESULT put_envnumharmonics(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 355

356 EnvPRF Property DescriptionGets or sets the pulse repetition frequency in envelope domain. VB Syntax app.envprf = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the pulse repetition frequency. Default5 khz Examples Nvna.EnvPRF = 3000 'Write value = Nvna.EnvPRF 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envprf(double* pval) HRESULT put_envprf(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 356

357 EnvPulseDelay Property DescriptionGets or sets the source pulse delay in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvPulseDelay = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the source pulse delay. Default50 usec Examples Nvna.EnvPulseDelay = 10e-6 'Write value = Nvna.EnvPulseDelay 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envpulsedelay(double* pval) HRESULT put_envpulsedelay(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 357

358 EnvPulseWidth Property DescriptionGets or sets the source pulse width in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvPulseWidth = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the source pulse width. Default100 usec Examples Nvna.EnvPulseWidth = 50e-6 'Write value = Nvna.EnvPulseWidth 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envpulsewidth(double* pval) HRESULT put_envpulsewidth(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 358

359 EnvSourceFreq Property DescriptionGets or sets the source frequency in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvSourceFreq = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the source frequency. Default1 GHz Examples Nvna.EnvSourceFreq = 500e6 'Write value = Nvna.EnvSourceFreq 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envsourcefreq(double* pval) HRESULT put_envsourcefreq(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 359

360 EnvSourcePower Property DescriptionGets or sets the source power in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvSourcePower = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the source power. Default-5 dbm Examples Nvna.EnvSourcePower = -10 'Write value = Nvna.EnvSourcePower 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envsourcepower(double* pval) HRESULT put_envsourcepower(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 360

361 EnvTimeStart Property DescriptionGets or sets the start time in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvTimeStart = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the start time. Default0 Examples Nvna.EnvTimeStart = 10e-12 'Write value = Nvna.EnvTimeStart 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envtimestart(double* pval) HRESULT put_envtimestart(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 361

362 EnvTimeStep Property DescriptionGets or sets the step time in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvTimeStep = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the step time. Default1 usec Examples Nvna.EnvTimeStep = 20e-9 'Write value = Nvna.EnvTimeStep 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envtimestep(double* pval) HRESULT put_envtimestep(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 362

363 EnvTimeStop Property DescriptionGets or sets the stop time in envelope domain. VB Syntaxapp.EnvTimeStop = value Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) value(double) The value of the stop time. Default195 usec Examples Nvna.EnvTimeStop = 100e-6 'Write value = Nvna.EnvTimeStop 'Read C++ SyntaxHRESULT get_envtimestop(double* pval) HRESULT put_envtimestop(double newval) InterfaceIApplication 363

364 GenerateXParamFromFiles Method DescriptionGenerates X-parameters from measured data files. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.generatexparamfromfiles (folder, outfile, PHDfile) Variable(Type) - Description success (boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True X-parameters generated successfully False Unable to extract X-parameters app An Application (object) folder (string) The intermediate folder which contains X-parameter measurements. outfile (string) - The output file name without extension PHDfile (boolean) - True - Write PHD file (normalized X-parameters) False - Raw X-parameters DefaultNot Applicable Examples Nvna.GenerateXParamFromFiles "C:\Program Files\Agilent\Keysight Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer\SaveData","C:\Program Files\Agilent\Keysight Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer\Xparam", True C++ Syntax HRESULT GenerateXParamFromFiles(BSTR folder, BSTR outfile, bool PHDfile) InterfaceIApplication 364

365 GetEnvComplex Method DescriptionRetrieves complex envelope domain data under the specified conditions. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.getenvcomplex (datastore, real(), imag()) Variable(Type) - Description success (boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True Retrieves the data successfully. False Cannot retrieve the data. appj An Application (object) datastore Choose from: 0 - RawData 1 - CorrectedData real (double) - Array to store the real part of the complex values. The data sequence is: wave, harmonic, time data. i.e. A1 wave(harmonic 1<time data array>, harmonic 2<time data array>,, A2 wave imag (double) - Array to store the imaginary part of the complex values DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim Success As Boolean Dim Real() As Single, Imag() As Single Success = Nvna.GetGenData(DataStore_RawData, Real, Imag) C++ Syntax IApplication - HRESULT GetEnvComplex(enum DataStore datastore, SAFEARRAY** real, SAFEARRAY** imag, VARIANT_BOOL *bsuccess) InterfaceIApplication 365

366 GetEnvData Method DescriptionRetrieves envelope domain data under the specified conditions. VB Syntaxdata = app.getenvdata (datastore, format, wave, harmonic, expind) Variable(Type) - Description data (Variant) - Array to store the returned values. Each element is a type single. app An Application (object) datastore Choose from: 0 - RawData 1 - CorrectedData format Choose from: 0 - LogMag 1 - LinMag 2 Phase 3 Real 4 - Imag wave Choose from: 0 A1 wave 1 B1 wave 2 A2 wave 3 B2 wave harmonic The harmonic index. Choose from 1 ~ harmonics setup. expindex The index of the experiment. Now only 0 is valid. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim Success As Boolean Dim data As Variant data = Nvna.GetEnvData(DataStore_RawData, DataFormat_LogMag, 0, 1, 0) C++ SyntaxHRESULT GetEnvData(enum DataStore datastore, enum DataFormat format, int wave, int harmonic, int expind, VARIANT *data) InterfaceIApplication 366

367 367

368 GetErrorTerm Method DescriptionReads the calibration error terms. VB Syntaxdata = app.geterrorterm (errorterm) Variable(Type) - Description data (Variant) - Two-dimensional array to store the returned data. Each element is a type single. The two elements represent the real and imaginary parts of a complex pair. app An Application (object) errorterm (String) - The string name used to identify a particular error term. Choose from: e00_p1, e01_p1, e10_p1, e11_p1, e00_p2, e01_p2, e10_p2, e11_p2 See how to interpret these terms. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim data As Variant, i data = Nvna.GetErrorTerm( e00_p1 ) If (Not IsEmpty(data)) Then For i = LBound(data) To UBound(data) MsgBox data(i, 0) &, & data(i, 1) Next i End If C++ Syntax HRESULT GetErrorTerm(BSTR errorterm, VARIANT *data) InterfaceIApplication 368

369 GetErrorTermFreqSet Method DescriptionReads the frequency set with which the error terms correspond. VB SyntaxfreqSet = app.geterrortermfreqset() Variable(Type) - Description freqset (Variant) - Array to store the returned data. Each element is a type single. app An Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim freqset As Variant freqset = Nvna.GetErrorTermFreqSet C++ Syntax HRESULT GetErrorTermFreqSet(VARIANT *freqset) InterfaceIApplication 369

370 GetExtMeasData Method DescriptionRetrieves measured variable values of external instruments. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.getextmeasdata(varname, domain, powerindex, freqindex, expindex, data) Variable(Type) - Description success (Boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True Retrieves the data successfully. False Cannot retrieve the data app An Application (object) varname Variable name domain Choose from: 0 General domain 1 Envelope domain powerindex The index of the power set. freqindex The index of the frequency set. expindex The index of the experiment. data (string) Variable values. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim Success As Boolean Dim data As String Success = Nvna.GetExtMeasData( variable_name, Domain_General, 0, 0, 0, data) C++ SyntaxHRESULT GetExtMeasData(BSTR varname, Domain domain, LONG powerindex, LONG freqindex, LONG expindex, BSTR* data, VARIANT_BOOL* bsuccess) InterfaceIApplication 370

371 GetFreqSet Method DescriptionRetrieves frequency set in general domain. VB SyntaxfreqSet = app.getfreqset ( ) Variable(Type) - Description freqset app (Variant) - Array to store the returned values. Each element is a type single. An Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim FreqSet As Variant FreqSet = Nvna.GetFreqSet() C++ Syntax IApplication - HRESULT GetFreqSet(VARIANT* freqset) InterfaceIApplication 371

372 GetGenData Method DescriptionRetrieves general domain data under the specified conditions. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.getgendata (datastore, datadomain, format, wave, freqsetindex, powersetindex, expindex, Xdata(), Ydata()) Variable(Type) - Description success (boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True Retrieves the data successfully. False Cannot retrieve the data. app An Application (object) datastore Choose from: 0 - RawData 1 - CorrectedData datadomain Choose from: 0 - Frequency 1 - Time 2 - Power format Choose from: 0 - LogMag 1 - LinMag 2 Phase 3 Real 4 - Imag wave Choose from: 0 A1 wave 1 B1 wave 2 A2 wave 3 B2 wave freqsetindex The index of the frequency set. 372

373 powersetindex The index of the power set when datadomain is Frequency or Time. When datadomain is Power, this parameter is harmonic index. expindex The index of the experiment. Now only 0 is valid. Xdata (double) - Array to store the X-axis values of the plot. Ydata (double) - Array to store the Y-axis values of the plot. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim Success As Boolean Dim Xdata() As Single, Ydata() As Single Success = Nvna.GetGenData(DataStore_RawData, DataDomain_Frequency, DataFormat_LogMag, 0, 0, 1, 0, Xdata, Ydata) C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT GetGenData(enum DataStore datastore, enum DataDomain domain, enum DataFormat format, int wave, int freqsetindex, int powersetindex, int expindex, SAFEARRAY** Xdata, SAFEARRAY** Ydata, VARIANT_BOOL *bsuccess) InterfaceIApplication 373

374 GetHarmonicsNum Method DescriptionGets the number of harmonics for a fundamental frequency in general domain. VB SyntaxharmonicsNum = app.getharmonicsnum (freqsetindex) Variable (Type) - Description harmonicsnum (long) - Variable to store the returned value. The number of harmonics for the specified frequency set index. 0 is returned if the number of harmonics cannot be retrieved. app An Application (object) freqsetindex The index of the frequency set. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim harmonicsnum As Long harmonicsnum = Nvna.GetHarmonicsNum(0) C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT GetHarmonicsNum(int freqsetindex, int * pharmonicsnum) InterfaceIApplication 374

375 GetIFBW Method DescriptionReads the IF Bandwidth value in a segment table VB Syntaxvalue = app.getifbw(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (single) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application (object) row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the IFBW is read. Rows start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getifbw(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetIFBW(int row, double * pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 375

376 GetMultitoneData Method DescriptionRetrieves multitone domain data by sweep index. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.getmultitonedata(datastore, wave, sweepindex, real(), imag()) Variable(Type) - Description success(boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True - Retrieves the data successfully. False - Cannot retrieve the data. appan Application (object) datastorechoose from: 0 - RawData 1 - CorrectedData wavechoose from: 0 A1 wave 1 B1 wave 2 A2 wave 3 B2 wave sweepindexthe index of the sweep. Multiple sweeps are nested across frequency and/or power range, as well as variables. To allow for an arbitrary number of frequency ranges and/or power ranges as well as the variables, the nested sweeps are flattened into a single sweep index for the purposes of data access. For example, if there are one fundamental frequency with 2 frequency points (1 GHz to 2 GHz) and one source with 3 power points (-20 dbm to -10 dbm) without any variables the mapping is as follows: Sweep Index Frequency Index Power Index 0 0 (1 GHz) 0 (-20 dbm) 1 0 (1 GHz) 1 (-15 dbm) 2 0 (1 GHz) 2 (-10 dbm) 376

377 3 1 (2 GHz) 0 (-20 dbm) 4 1 (2 GHz) 1 (-15 dbm) 5 1 (2 GHz) 2 (-10 dbm) More than one external variable can be swept, and multiple sweeps are also nested above frequency and power sweeps. For example, if there are two variables with 3 values each the mapping is as follows (assuming only one point frequency and one point power for simplicity): Sweep Index Var1 Index Var2 Index Frequency Index Power Index (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) (1GHz only) 0(-20dBm only) real(double) - Array to store the real part of the complex data. imag(double) - Array to store the imaginary part of the complex data. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim Success As Boolean Dim real() As Double, imag() As Double Success = Nvna.GetMultitoneData(DataStore_RawData, 0, 0, real, imag) C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT GetMultitoneData(enum DataStore datastore, int wave, int sweepindex, SAFEARRAY** real, SAFEARRAY** imag, VARIANT_BOOL *bsuccess) 377

378 InterfaceIApplication 378

379 GetMultitoneData2 Method DescriptionRetrieves multitone domain data by variable values. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.getmultitonedata2(datastore, wave, varvalues(), real(), imag()) Variable(Type) - Description success(boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True - Retrieves the data successfully. False - Cannot retrieve the data. appan Application (object) datastorechoose from: 0 - RawData 1 - CorrectedData wavechoose from: 0 - A1 wave 1 - B1 wave 2 - A2 wave 3 - B2 wave varvalues(double) - The values list of sweep variables, as well as the frequencies and powers. The sequence is: variable1, variable2,..., freq1, freq2,..., src1, src2,... real(double) - Array to store the real part of the complex data. imag(double) - Array to store the imaginary part of the complex data. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim Success As Boolean Dim varvalues(1 to 2) As Double Dim real() As Double, imag() As Double varvalues(1) = 1e9 1 GHz varvalues(2) = dbm Success = Nvna.GetMultitoneData2(DataStore_RawData, 0, varvalues, real, imag) 379

380 C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT GetMultitoneData2(enum DataStore datastore, int wave, SAFEARRAY** varvalues, SAFEARRAY** real, SAFEARRAY** imag, VARIANT_BOOL *bsuccess) InterfaceIApplication 380

381 GetNumFreq Method DescriptionReads the number of frequency points in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getnumfreq(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (long) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the number of frequency points is read. Rows start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getnumfreq(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetNumFreq(int row, int* pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 381

382 GetNumHarmonics Method DescriptionReads the maximum number of Harmonic in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getnumharmonics(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (long) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the number of Harmonics is read. Rows start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getnumharmonics(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetNumHarmonics(int row, int* pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 382

383 GetNumPowers Method DescriptionReads the number of Power points in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getnumpowers(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (long) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the number of Power points is read. Rows start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getnumpowers(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetNumPowers(int row, int* pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 383

384 GetPowerSet Method DescriptionRetrieves power set in general domain. VB SyntaxpowerSet = app.getpowerset (freqsetindex) Variable(Type) - Description powerset (Variant) - Array to store the returned values. Each element is a type single. app An Application (object) freqsetindex The index of the frequency set. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim PowerSet As Variant PowerSet = Nvna.GetPowerSet(0) C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT GetPowerSet(int freqsetindex, VARIANT* powerset) InterfaceIApplication 384

385 GetPowerSweepDomain Method DescriptionReads the power sweep domain in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getpowersweepdomain(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (long) Variable to store the returned value. 0 - dbm 1 - Volts app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the Power sweep domain is read. Rows start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getpowersweepdomain(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetPowerSweepDomain (int row, int * pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 385

386 GetStartFreq Method DescriptionReads the start frequency value in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getstartfreq(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (double) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the start frequency is read. Rows start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getstartfreq(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetStartFreq(int row, double * pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 386

387 GetStartPower Method DescriptionReads the Start Power value in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getstartpower(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (double) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the Start Power is read. Rows Start at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getstartpower(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetStartPower(int row, double * pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 387

388 GetStopFreq Method DescriptionReads the Stop frequency value in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getstopfreq(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (double) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the Stop frequency is read. Rows Stop at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getstopfreq(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetStopFreq(int row, double * pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 388

389 GetStopPower Method DescriptionReads the Stop Power value in a segment table. VB Syntaxvalue = app.getstoppower(row) Variable(Type) - Description value (double) Variable to store the returned value. app An Application object row (long) The index of the row in segment table from which the Stop Power is read. Rows Stop at 1. DefaultNot Applicable Examples value = app.getstoppower(1) C++ Syntax HRESULT GetStopPower(int row, double * pvalue) InterfaceIApplication 389

390 GetXparameter Method DescriptionRetrieves X-parameter data. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.getxparameter (datastore, freqsetindex, powersetindex, type, outportno, outharmonic, inportno, inharmonic, expindex, real, imag) Variable(Type) - Description success (boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True Retrieves the data successfully. False Cannot retrieve the data. app An Application (object) datastore (enum) Choose from: 0 - RawData 1 - CorrectedData freqsetindex (long) The index of the frequency set. powersetindex (long) The index of the power set. type (long) Choose from: 1 - XSS parameter 2 - XTT parameter outportno (long) The output port number. outharmonic (long) The output harmonic index. Choose from: 1 - harmonics setup. inportno (long) The input port number. inharmonic (long) The input harmonic index. Choose from 1 - harmonics setup. expindex (long) The index of the experiment. Input 0 if no external swept variable is set. real (double) - The real part of the complex parameter. imag (double) - The imaginary part of the complex parameter. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim real As Single, imag As Single success = Nvna.GetXparameter(DataStore_CorrectedData, 0, 0, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 0, real, imag) C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT GetXparameter(enum DataStore datastore, int freqsetindex, int powersetindex, int type, int outportno, int 390

391 outharmonic, int inportno, int inharmonic, int expindex, double* real, double* imag, VARIANT_BOOL *bsuccess) InterfaceIApplication 391

392 IDString Property NVNA Online Help Description Returns the ID of the NVNA, including the Model number, Serial Number, and the Software revision number. VB Syntax value = app.idstring Variable (Type) - Description app value An Application (object) (string) - variable to contain the returned ID string Return Type String Default Not Applicable Examples id = app.idstring C++ Syntax HRESULT IDString(BSTR* IDString) Interface IApplication 392

393 IsCalValid Method DescriptionQueries for a valid NVNA cal. VB SyntaxcalValid = app.iscalvalid Variable(Type) - Description calvalid (boolean) - Variable to store the returned value True A valid cal exists False No valid cal exists. app An Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Examples dim calvalid as boolean calvalid = app.iscalvalid C++ SyntaxHRESULT IsCalValid(VARIANT_BOOL *bcalvalid) InterfaceIApplication 393

394 LaunchCalWizard Method DescriptionLaunches the Cal Wizard on the NVNA and does not return until the Cal Wizard is dismissed. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.launchcalwizard Variable(Type) - Description success (boolean) - variable to store the returned value True - The Cal was completed False - The Cal was canceled without completing the calibration. app An Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Example dim bsuccess as boolean bsuccess = app.launchcalwizard C++ SyntaxHRESULT LaunchCalWizard(VARIANT_BOOL *bcalsuccess) InterfaceIApplication 394

395 LimitMeasurementBandwidth Method DescriptionLimits the measurement bandwith. VB Syntaxapp.LimitMeasurementBandwidth (limit, start, stop) Variable(Type) Description appan Application (object) limit(boolean) True - Limits the measurement bandwidth with the specified start and stop frequency range. False - Do not limit the measurement bandwidth. The start and stop arguments are ignored. start(double) The start frequency of the limited measurement bandwidth. stop(double) The top frequency of the limited measurement bandwidth. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Nvna. LimitMeasurementBandwidth(True, , ) C++ SyntaxHRESULT LimitMeasurementBandwidth(VARIANT_BOOL blimit, double dstart, double dstop); InterfaceIApplication 395

396 Measure Method DescriptionTriggers a synchronous measurement and returns when the measurement is completed. Note: ALWAYS use MeasureAsync Method for measurements that require more than about 30 seconds to complete. MeasureAsync method completely replaces this (Measure) method by polling for the status of MeasureIsCompleted property. This does NOT show the trace screen as it does from the GUI. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.measure() Variable (Type) - Description success (boolean) - Variable to store the returned value. True Measured successfully app False Error during measurement. An Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Examples dim bsuccess as boolean bsuccess = app.measure() C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT Measure(VARIANT_BOOL *bsuccess) InterfaceIApplication Last Modified: 1-Mar Apr-2008 Updated with MeasureAsync New topic 396

397 MeasureAsync Method Description Trigger a measurement (asynchronously) and return immediately. This method allows your program to do other work while waiting for the results of a measurement. This (MeasureAsync) method completely replaces Measure when using one of the following options: Polling for the status of an asynchronous measurement: use MeasureIsCompleted to determine whether the measurement has completed. Use MeasureCompleted event to process the results of the asynchronous measurement. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.measureasync( ) Variable (Type) - Description app success An Application (object) (boolean) Indicates whether the asynchronous measurement was started successfully or not. Does NOT contain the results of the measurement. False - Measurement NOT started successfully. True - Measurement started successfully. DefaultNot Applicable Examples success=app.measureasync() C++ Syntax HRESULT MeasureAsync (VARIANT_BOOL * bsuccess) Interface IApplication 397

398 MeasureAsyncCancel Method Description Cancels an asynchronous measurement. VB Syntaxapp.MeasureAsyncCancel Variable (Type) - Description app An Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Examples app.measureasynccancel C++ Syntax HRESULT MeasureAsyncCancel ( ) Interface IApplication Last Modified: 24-Feb-2011 New topic 398

399 MeasureCompleted Event Description Signals the completion of asynchronous measurement. Use MeasureAsync Method to begin the measurement. VB SyntaxSub app.measurecompleted(byval validmeas As Boolean) Variable (Type) - Description app validmeas An Application (object) (boolean) Indicates whether the measurement result is valid. Use appropriate commands, such as GetMultitoneData2, to read the measurement data if valid. False - Asynchronous measurement NOT valid. True - Asynchronous measurement IS valid. DefaultNot Applicable Examples Sub nvna_measurecompleted(byval validmeas As Boolean) your code here to handle the measurement result End Sub Interface IApplication 399

400 MeasureIsCompleted Property Description Returns an indication whether the asynchronous measurement has completed. Use MeasureAsync Method to begin the measurement. VB Syntaxsuccess = app.measureiscompleted( ) Variable (Type) - Description app success An Application (object) (boolean) Indicates whether the asynchronous measurement has completed. Does NOT contain the results of the measurement. False - Asynchronous measurement NOT completed. True - Asynchronous measurement completed. DefaultNot Applicable Examples success=app.measureiscompleted() C++ Syntax HRESULT get_measureiscompleted (VARIANT_BOOL * bsuccess) Interface IApplication 400

401 MeasurementConfiguration Method DescriptionRetrieves MeasurementConfiguration object. VB SyntaxSet MeasConfig = app.measurementconfiguration Variable(Type) - Description MeasConfigA variable to store the MeasurementConfiguration object. appan Application (object) DefaultNot Applicable Examples Dim app As AgilentNVNA.Application Dim MeasConfig As AgilentNVNA.MeasurementConfiguration Set app = CreateObject("AgilentNVNA.Application") app.domain = Domain_Multitone Set MeasConfig = app.measurementconfiguration MeasConfig.AddFund MeasConfig.SetSweepSeg 1, 0, 1.15e9, 1.15e9, 1, SweepMode_Linear Apply the measurement settings app.applysetup C++ SyntaxIApplication - HRESULT MeasurementConfiguration(IMeasurementConfiguration** ppmeasconfig) InterfaceIApplication 401

402 PathConfiguration Property Description Sets or reads the specified path configuration element setting. VB Syntaxapp.PathConfiguration (element) = value Variable(Type) - Description element value app An Application (object) (String) Element to be set. See tables below for valid elements. (String) Element setting. See tables below for valid settings. DefaultNot Applicable Examples app.pathconfiguration("pulsemoddrive") = "ON" 'Write value = app.pathconfiguration("pulsemoddrive")'read C++ Syntax HRESULT get_pathconfiguration(bstr element, BSTR * pvalue) HRESULT put_pathconfiguration(bstr element, BSTR pvalue) Interface IApplication RF and IF Path Configuration Elements The tables below show RF and IF Path Configuration Elements for the 4-port PNA-X Opt 423. These commands are the same as those used to control these elements in the PNA- X firmware. Red elements are NOT supported in the NVNA software. See the entire RF Path and IF Path configuration topics in PNAHelp. RF Path Block diagram 402

403 Ref# Element Name Settings #1 "Combiner" This selection only draws connection lines. No switches are thrown. "Normal" "Reversed" #2 "Src1Out1LowBand" "Filtered" (default) "HiPwr" #3 "Src2Out1LowBand" "Filtered" (default) "HiPwr" #4 "Port1Bypass" "Thru" (default) "Combiner" #5 "Port2Bypass" "Thru" (default) "RearPanel" #6 "Port3Bypass" "Thru" (default) "Combiner" #7 "Port4Bypass" "Thru" (default) 403

404 "RearPanel" #8 "Port1RefMxr" "Internal" "External" (default) PNA-X IF / Pulse Generators / DSP Block Diagram ONLY elements #7, #8, and #9 are supported in NVNA firmware Red elements are NOT supported in the NVNA software. Switch 7 Pulse Modulation - 1 of 7 lines to each of the sources. Important : When internally modulating the sources, source leveling is automatically set to Open-loop. Source1 and Source2 pulse modulators : (#8 and #9 on the above diagram) Ref# Element Name Description Settings 1 "IFSW n " For 2-port PNA-X and N522x, n = For 4-port PNA-X and N522x, n = to R4) For example: "IFSWB" A, B, R1, R2 A, B, C, D, R (for R1 "Internal" "External" Rear Panel IF connectors. 4-port PNA-X and N522x use R for Ref 1 to 4 404

Keysight Technologies Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA) Breakthrough technology for nonlinear vector network analysis from 10 MHz to 67 GHz

Keysight Technologies Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA) Breakthrough technology for nonlinear vector network analysis from 10 MHz to 67 GHz Keysight Technologies Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA) Breakthrough technology for nonlinear vector network analysis from 1 MHz to 67 GHz 2 Keysight Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA) - Brochure

More information

Keysight Technologies PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers

Keysight Technologies PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers Keysight Technologies PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers Active-Device Characterization in Pulsed Operation Using the PNA-X Application Note Introduction Vector network analyzers (VNA) are the common

More information

External Source Control

External Source Control External Source Control X-Series Signal Analyzers Option ESC DEMO GUIDE Introduction External source control for X-Series signal analyzers (Option ESC) allows the Keysight PXA, MXA, EXA, and CXA to control

More information

PNA Family Microwave Network Analyzers (N522x/3x/4xB) CONFIGURATION GUIDE

PNA Family Microwave Network Analyzers (N522x/3x/4xB) CONFIGURATION GUIDE PNA Family Microwave Network Analyzers (N522x/3x/4xB) CONFIGURATION GUIDE Table of Contents PNA Family Network Analyzer Configurations... 05 Test set and power configuration options...05 Hardware options...

More information

Compact Series: S5065 & S5085 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES

Compact Series: S5065 & S5085 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES Compact Series: S5065 & S5085 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES Frequency range: 9 khz - 6.5 or 8.5 GHz Measured parameters: S11, S12, S21, S22 Wide output power adjustment range: -50 dbm to +5 dbm

More information

PLANAR 814/1. Vector Network Analyzer

PLANAR 814/1. Vector Network Analyzer PLANAR 814/1 Vector Network Analyzer Frequency range: 100 khz 8 GHz Measured parameters: S11, S12, S21, S22 Wide output power range: -60 dbm to +10 dbm >150 db dynamic range (1 Hz IF bandwidth) Direct

More information

Keysight Technologies Making Accurate Intermodulation Distortion Measurements with the PNA-X Network Analyzer, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz

Keysight Technologies Making Accurate Intermodulation Distortion Measurements with the PNA-X Network Analyzer, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Keysight Technologies Making Accurate Intermodulation Distortion Measurements with the PNA-X Network Analyzer, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz Application Note Overview This application note describes accuracy considerations

More information

Agilent Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA)

Agilent Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA) Agilent Nonlinear Vector Network Analyzer (NVNA) Breakthrough technology for nonlinear vector network analysis from 1 MHz to 67 GHz I know my amplifier gain is changing with output match, but Hot S22 measurements

More information

Agilent Technologies Gli analizzatori di reti della serie-x

Agilent Technologies Gli analizzatori di reti della serie-x Agilent Technologies Gli analizzatori di reti della serie-x Luigi Fratini 1 Introducing the PNA-X Performance Network Analyzer For Active Device Test 500 GHz & beyond! 325 GHz 110 GHz 67 GHz 50 GHz 43.5

More information

PLANAR S5048 and TR5048

PLANAR S5048 and TR5048 PLANAR S5048 and TR5048 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES Frequency range: 20 khz 4.8 GHz COM/DCOM compatible for LabView Measured parameters: and automation programming S11, S12, S21, S22 (S5048)

More information

Pulsed VNA Measurements:

Pulsed VNA Measurements: Pulsed VNA Measurements: The Need to Null! January 21, 2004 presented by: Loren Betts Copyright 2004 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Agenda Pulsed RF Devices Pulsed Signal Domains VNA Spectral Nulling Measurement

More information

Experiment 12 - Measuring X-Parameters Using Nonlinear Vector Netowrk Analyzer

Experiment 12 - Measuring X-Parameters Using Nonlinear Vector Netowrk Analyzer ECE 451 Automated Microwave Measurements Laboratory Experiment 12 - Measuring X-Parameters Using Nonlinear Vector Netowrk Analyzer 1 Introduction In this experiment, rstly, we will be measuring X-parameters

More information

Impedance 50 (75 connectors via adapters)

Impedance 50 (75 connectors via adapters) VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER PLANAR 304/1 DATA SHEET Frequency range: 300 khz to 3.2 GHz Measured parameters: S11, S21, S12, S22 Dynamic range of transmission measurement magnitude: 135 db Measurement time

More information

Platform Migration 8510 to PNA. Graham Payne Application Engineer Agilent Technologies

Platform Migration 8510 to PNA. Graham Payne Application Engineer Agilent Technologies Platform Migration 8510 to PNA Graham Payne Application Engineer Agilent Technologies We set the standard... 8410 8510 When we introduced the 8510, we changed the way S-parameter measurements were made!

More information

A Simplified Extension of X-parameters to Describe Memory Effects for Wideband Modulated Signals

A Simplified Extension of X-parameters to Describe Memory Effects for Wideband Modulated Signals Jan Verspecht bvba Mechelstraat 17 B-1745 Opwijk Belgium email: contact@janverspecht.com web: http://www.janverspecht.com A Simplified Extension of X-parameters to Describe Memory Effects for Wideband

More information

Configuration of PNA-X, NVNA and X parameters

Configuration of PNA-X, NVNA and X parameters Configuration of PNA-X, NVNA and X parameters VNA 1. S-Parameter Measurements 2. Harmonic Measurements NVNA 3. X-Parameter Measurements Introducing the PNA-X 50 GHz 43.5 GHz 26.5 GHz 13.5 GHz PNA-X Agilent

More information

Load Pull with X-Parameters

Load Pull with X-Parameters Load Pull with X-Parameters A New Paradigm for Modeling and Design Gary Simpson, CTO Maury Microwave March 2009 For a more detailed version of this presentation, go to www.maurymw.com/presentations 1 Outline

More information

Compact Series: S5048 & TR5048 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES

Compact Series: S5048 & TR5048 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES Compact Series: S5048 & TR5048 Vector Network Analyzers KEY FEATURES Frequency range: 20 khz - 4.8 GHz Measured parameters: S11, S12, S21, S22 (S5048) S11, S21 (TR5048) Wide output power adjustment range:

More information

How do I optimize desired Amplifier Specifications?

How do I optimize desired Amplifier Specifications? How do I optimize desired Amplifier Specifications? PAE (accuracy

More information

TEST & MEASURING INSTRUMENTS. Analyzer. (4 Ports) 4 Ports

TEST & MEASURING INSTRUMENTS. Analyzer. (4 Ports) 4 Ports TEST & MEASURING INSTRUMENTS Analyzer (4 Ports) 4 Ports Key Features Frequrncy Range : 100kHz ~ 8GHz, 16 Parameters support (S11 ~ S44) Measurement time per point : 100us per point Wide Output Power Range

More information

IVCAD VNA Base Load Pull with Active/Hybrid Tuning. Getting Started v3.5

IVCAD VNA Base Load Pull with Active/Hybrid Tuning. Getting Started v3.5 IVCAD VNA Base Load Pull with Active/Hybrid Tuning Getting Started v3.5 1 Setting and Configuration Block Diagram... 3 1.1 VNA setup... 5 1.2 RF source setup... 6 1.3 Power meter setup... 7 1.4 Source

More information

Keysight Technologies Amplifier and CW Swept Intermodulation - Distortion Measurements using the PNA Microwave Network Analyzers.

Keysight Technologies Amplifier and CW Swept Intermodulation - Distortion Measurements using the PNA Microwave Network Analyzers. Keysight Technologies Amplifier and CW Swept Intermodulation - Distortion Measurements using the PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Application Note Introduction This application note covers testing of an

More information

PXA Configuration. Frequency range

PXA Configuration. Frequency range Keysight Technologies Making Wideband Measurements Using the Keysight PXA Signal Analyzer as a Down Converter with Infiniium Oscilloscopes and 89600 VSA Software Application Note Introduction Many applications

More information

Network Analysis Basics

Network Analysis Basics Adolfo Del Solar Application Engineer adolfo_del-solar@agilent.com MD1010 Network B2B Agenda Overview What Measurements do we make? Network Analyzer Hardware Error Models and Calibration Example Measurements

More information

Hot S 22 and Hot K-factor Measurements

Hot S 22 and Hot K-factor Measurements Application Note Hot S 22 and Hot K-factor Measurements Scorpion db S Parameter Smith Chart.5 2 1 Normal S 22.2 Normal S 22 5 0 Hot S 22 Hot S 22 -.2-5 875 MHz 975 MHz -.5-2 To Receiver -.1 DUT Main Drive

More information

Fast, Simple, Accurate Applies to Mixers Too

Fast, Simple, Accurate Applies to Mixers Too Fast, Simple, Accurate Applies to Mixers Too Joel Dunsmore, Ph.D. Agilent Fellow Component Test Division R&D 1 2013 Agilent Technologies All-in-one Measurement Systems SCMM Performs S-parameter, IMD, Gain

More information

New Ultra-Fast Noise Parameter System... Opening A New Realm of Possibilities in Noise Characterization

New Ultra-Fast Noise Parameter System... Opening A New Realm of Possibilities in Noise Characterization New Ultra-Fast Noise Parameter System... Opening A New Realm of Possibilities in Noise Characterization David Ballo Application Development Engineer Agilent Technologies Gary Simpson Chief Technology Officer

More information

RF and Microwave Test and Design Roadshow 5 Locations across Australia and New Zealand

RF and Microwave Test and Design Roadshow 5 Locations across Australia and New Zealand RF and Microwave Test and Design Roadshow 5 Locations across Australia and New Zealand Advanced VNA Measurements Agenda Overview of the PXIe-5632 Architecture SW Experience Overview of VNA Calibration

More information

Measurements 2: Network Analysis

Measurements 2: Network Analysis Measurements 2: Network Analysis Fritz Caspers CAS, Aarhus, June 2010 Contents Scalar network analysis Vector network analysis Early concepts Modern instrumentation Calibration methods Time domain (synthetic

More information

PLANAR 804/1. Vector Network Analyzer

PLANAR 804/1. Vector Network Analyzer PLANAR 804/1 Vector Network Analyzer Frequency range: 100 khz 8 GHz Measured parameters: S11, S12, S21, S22 Wide output power range: -60 dbm to +10 dbm >145 db dynamic range (1 Hz IF bandwidth) Time domain

More information

Millimeter Signal Measurements: Techniques, Solutions and Best Practices

Millimeter Signal Measurements: Techniques, Solutions and Best Practices New Network Analyzer platform Millimeter Signal Measurements: Techniques, Solutions and Best Practices Phase Noise measurements update 1 N522XA PNA Series Network Analyzer Introducing Highest Performance

More information

IMD Measurement Wizard for the E5072A ENA Series Network Analyzer Operation Manual. Agilent Technologies June 2012

IMD Measurement Wizard for the E5072A ENA Series Network Analyzer Operation Manual. Agilent Technologies June 2012 IMD Measurement Wizard for the E5072A ENA Series Network Analyzer Operation Manual Agilent Technologies June 2012 1 Important Notice Notices The information contained in this document is subject to change

More information

Keysight Technologies An Evaluation of X-parameter*, P2D and S2D Models for Characterizing Nonlinear Behavior in Active Devices.

Keysight Technologies An Evaluation of X-parameter*, P2D and S2D Models for Characterizing Nonlinear Behavior in Active Devices. Keysight Technologies An Evaluation of X-parameter*, P2D and S2D Models for Characterizing Nonlinear Behavior in Active Devices Application Note Introduction All active devices exhibit nonlinear behavior

More information

Extension of X-parameters to Include Long-Term Dynamic Memory Effects

Extension of X-parameters to Include Long-Term Dynamic Memory Effects Jan Verspecht bvba Mechelstraat 17 B-1745 Opwijk Belgium email: contact@janverspecht.com web: http://www.janverspecht.com Extension of X-parameters to Include Long-Term Dynamic Memory Effects Jan Verspecht,

More information

Agilent PNA Microwave Network Analyzers

Agilent PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Agilent PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Application Note 1408-3 Improving Measurement and Calibration Accuracy using the Frequency Converter Application Table of Contents Introduction................................................................2

More information

AV3672 Series Vector Network Analyzer

AV3672 Series Vector Network Analyzer AV3672 Series Vector Network Analyzer AV3672A/B/C/D/E (10MHz 13.5 GHz/26.5 GHz/43.5 GHz/50 GHz/67 GHz) Product Overview: AV3672 series vector network analyzer include AV3672A (10MHz 13.5GHz), AV3672B (10MHz

More information

Many devices, particularly

Many devices, particularly From March 2003 High Frequency Electronics Copyright 2003, Summit Technical Media, LLC Techniques for Pulsed S-Parameter Measurements By David Vondran Anritsu Company Many devices, particularly power Pulsed

More information

Power Amplifier Design Utilizing the NVNA and X-parameters

Power Amplifier Design Utilizing the NVNA and X-parameters IMS2011 Power Amplifier Design Utilizing the NVNA and X-parameters Loren Betts 1, Dylan T. Bespalko 2, Slim Boumaiza 2 1 Agilent Technologies, Santa Rosa CA, USA 2 University of Waterloo, Waterloo ON,

More information

Microwave Network Analyzers PNA-X Series BROCHURE

Microwave Network Analyzers PNA-X Series BROCHURE Microwave Network Analyzers PNA-X Series BROCHURE Industry s Most Advanced RF Test Solution Reach for unrivaled excellence Choose the leader in network analysis The PNA-X Series of microwave network analyzers

More information

Conversion Gain Measurements on Mixers with Different Input and Output Impedances

Conversion Gain Measurements on Mixers with Different Input and Output Impedances Products: ZVRE, ZVR, ZVCE, ZVC, ZVM, ZVK Conversion Gain Measurements on Mixers with Different Input and Output Impedances This Application Note describes how to configure and calibrate R&S ZVR network

More information

Keysight Technologies Pulsed Antenna Measurements Using PNA Network Analyzers

Keysight Technologies Pulsed Antenna Measurements Using PNA Network Analyzers Keysight Technologies Pulsed Antenna Measurements Using PNA Network Analyzers White Paper Abstract This paper presents advances in the instrumentation techniques that can be used for the measurement and

More information

PXIe Contents CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

PXIe Contents CALIBRATION PROCEDURE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE PXIe-5632 This document contains the verification and adjustment procedures for the PXIe-5632 Vector Network Analyzer. Refer to ni.com/calibration for more information about calibration

More information

Keysight Technologies PNA Microwave Network Analyzers

Keysight Technologies PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Keysight Technologies PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Application Note Banded Millimeter-Wave Measurements with the PNA 02 Keysight PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Application Note Table of Contents Introduction...

More information

Quick Start Guide for the PULSE PROFILING APPLICATION

Quick Start Guide for the PULSE PROFILING APPLICATION Quick Start Guide for the PULSE PROFILING APPLICATION MODEL LB480A Revision: Preliminary 02/05/09 1 1. Introduction This document provides information to install and quickly start using your PowerSensor+.

More information

Signal Generators for Anritsu RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments

Signal Generators for Anritsu RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments Measurement Guide Signal Generators for Anritsu RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments BTS Master Spectrum Master Tracking Generator Option 20 Vector signal Generator Option 23 Anritsu Company 490 Jarvis

More information

Keysight Technologies Accurate Mixer Measurements Using the ENA RF Networks Analyzers Frequency-Offset Mode. Application Note

Keysight Technologies Accurate Mixer Measurements Using the ENA RF Networks Analyzers Frequency-Offset Mode. Application Note Keysight Technologies Accurate Mixer Measurements Using the ENA RF Networks Analyzers Frequency-Offset Mode Application Note 1 Measurement Parameters of the Mixer The ENA FOM offers two advanced mixer

More information

Agilent PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers

Agilent PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers Agilent PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers Reach for unrivaled excellence 1 Choose the leader in network analysis Industry s Most Advanced RF Test Solution Reach for unrivaled excellence The PNA-X

More information

Large-Signal Measurements Going beyond S-parameters

Large-Signal Measurements Going beyond S-parameters Large-Signal Measurements Going beyond S-parameters Jan Verspecht, Frans Verbeyst & Marc Vanden Bossche Network Measurement and Description Group Innovating the HP Way Overview What is Large-Signal Network

More information

Keysight 2-Port and 4-Port PNA-X Network Analyzer

Keysight 2-Port and 4-Port PNA-X Network Analyzer Keysight 2-Port and 4-Port PNA-X Network Analyzer N5249A - 0 MHz to 8.5 GHz N524A - 0 MHz to 3.5 GHz N5242A - 0 MHz to 26.5 GHz Data Sheet and Technical Specifications Documentation Warranty THE MATERIAL

More information

Fast and Accurate Simultaneous Characterization of Signal Generator Source Match and Absolute Power Using X-Parameters.

Fast and Accurate Simultaneous Characterization of Signal Generator Source Match and Absolute Power Using X-Parameters. Fast and Accurate Simultaneous Characterization of Signal Generator Source Match and Absolute Power Using X-Parameters. April 15, 2015 Istanbul, Turkey R&D Principal Engineer, Component Test Division Keysight

More information

PLANAR R54. Vector Reflectometer KEY FEATURES

PLANAR R54. Vector Reflectometer KEY FEATURES PLANAR R54 Vector Reflectometer KEY FEATURES Frequency range: 85 MHz 5.4 GHz Reflection coefficient magnitude and phase, cable loss, DTF Transmission coefficient magnitude when using two reflectometers

More information

Vector Network Analyzers T - Series

Vector Network Analyzers T - Series Datasheet Vector Network Analyzers T - Series Wide dynamic range 130 db typ. Low noise level < -120 dbm Low trace noise 1 mdb rms High measurement speed 125ms/point High effective directivity > 45 db Remote

More information

Pulsed S-Parameter Measurements using the ZVA network Analyzer

Pulsed S-Parameter Measurements using the ZVA network Analyzer Pulsed S-Parameter Measurements using the ZVA network Analyzer 1 Pulse Profile measurements ZVA Advanced Network Analyser 3 Motivation for Pulsed Measurements Typical Applications Avoid destruction of

More information

HP Archive. This vintage Hewlett Packard document was preserved and distributed by www. hparchive.com Please visit us on the web!

HP Archive. This vintage Hewlett Packard document was preserved and distributed by www. hparchive.com Please visit us on the web! HP Archive This vintage Hewlett Packard document was preserved and distributed by www. hparchive.com Please visit us on the web! On-line curator: Glenn Robb This document is for FREE distribution only!

More information

Obtaining Flat Test Port Power with the Agilent 8360 s User Flatness Correction Feature. Product Note

Obtaining Flat Test Port Power with the Agilent 8360 s User Flatness Correction Feature. Product Note Obtaining Flat Test Port Power with the Agilent 8360 s User Flatness Correction Feature Product Note 8360-2 Introduction The 8360 series synthesized sweepers provide extremely flat power at your test port,

More information

A Simplified Extension of X-parameters to Describe Memory Effects for Wideband Modulated Signals

A Simplified Extension of X-parameters to Describe Memory Effects for Wideband Modulated Signals A Simplified Extension of X-parameters to Describe Memory Effects for Wideband Modulated Signals Jan Verspecht*, Jason Horn** and David E. Root** * Jan Verspecht b.v.b.a., Opwijk, Vlaams-Brabant, B-745,

More information

Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Cable and Antenna Analyzer Measurement Guide Cable and Antenna Analyzer for Anritsu s RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments BTS Master Anritsu Company 490 Jarvis Drive Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809 USA http://www.anritsu.com Part Number:

More information

A True Differential Millimeter Wave System with Port Power Control. Presented by: Suren Singh

A True Differential Millimeter Wave System with Port Power Control. Presented by: Suren Singh A True Differential Millimeter Wave System with Port Power Control Presented by: Suren Singh Agenda Need for True Differential and RF Power Control Vector Network Analyzer RF Port Power Control Port Power

More information

Agilent Pulsed Measurements Using Narrowband Detection and a Standard PNA Series Network Analyzer

Agilent Pulsed Measurements Using Narrowband Detection and a Standard PNA Series Network Analyzer Agilent Pulsed Measurements Using Narrowband Detection and a Standard PNA Series Network Analyzer White Paper Contents Introduction... 2 Pulsed Signals... 3 Pulsed Measurement Technique... 5 Narrowband

More information

MEASUREMENT OF LARGE SIGNAL DEVICE INPUT IMPEDANCE DURING LOAD PULL

MEASUREMENT OF LARGE SIGNAL DEVICE INPUT IMPEDANCE DURING LOAD PULL Model M956D CORPORAION MEASUREMEN OF LARGE SIGNAL DEVICE INPU IMPEDANCE DURING LOAD PULL Abstract Knowledge of device input impedance as a function of power level and load matching is useful to fully understand

More information

Antenna Measurement using Vector Network Analyzer. Jong-hwan Keum Agilent Technologies

Antenna Measurement using Vector Network Analyzer. Jong-hwan Keum Agilent Technologies Antenna Measurement using Vector Network Analyzer Jong-hwan Keum Agilent Technologies Agenda Overview Antenna Measurement System Configuration(Examples) Antenna Measurement System Design Considerations

More information

Keysight Technologies Measuring Group Delay of Frequency Converters with Embedded Local Oscillators. Application Note

Keysight Technologies Measuring Group Delay of Frequency Converters with Embedded Local Oscillators. Application Note Keysight Technologies Measuring Group Delay of Frequency Converters with Embedded Local Oscillators Application Note Introduction Mixers and frequency converters lie at the heart of wireless and satellite

More information

Load Pull with X-Parameters A New Paradigm for Modeling and Design

Load Pull with X-Parameters A New Paradigm for Modeling and Design Load Pull with X-Parameters A New Paradigm for Modeling and Design Gary Simpson, CTO Maury Microwave Anaheim, May 2010 For a more detailed version of this presentation, go to www.maurymw.com/presentation.htm

More information

Overcoming Mixer Measurement Challenges

Overcoming Mixer Measurement Challenges Overcoming Mixer Measurement Challenges October 10, 2002 presented by: Robb Myer Dave Ballo Today we will be looking at overcoming measurements challenges associated with frequency translating devices

More information

Keysight Technologies External Source Control X-Series Signal Analyzers Option ESC. Demo Guide

Keysight Technologies External Source Control X-Series Signal Analyzers Option ESC. Demo Guide Keysight Technologies External Source Control X-Series Signal Analyzers Option ESC Demo Guide External source control for X-Series signal analyzers (Option ESC) allows the Keysight PXA, MXA, EXA, and CXA

More information

Advanced Measurement Techniques for RF Amplifiers Using Unique Functions of the Agilent E5071C ENA. Application Note

Advanced Measurement Techniques for RF Amplifiers Using Unique Functions of the Agilent E5071C ENA. Application Note Advanced Measurement Techniques for RF Amplifiers Using Unique Functions of the Agilent E5071C ENA Application Note Introduction The RF amplifier is a key component used in a wide variety of industries

More information

Keysight Technologies Ampliier Linear and Gain Compression Measurements with the PNA Microwave Network Analyzers. Application Note

Keysight Technologies Ampliier Linear and Gain Compression Measurements with the PNA Microwave Network Analyzers. Application Note Keysight Technologies Ampliier Linear and Gain Compression Measurements with the PNA Microwave Network Analyzers Application Note Introduction This application note covers testing of an ampliier s linear

More information

Advanced Test Equipment Rentals ATEC (2832)

Advanced Test Equipment Rentals ATEC (2832) Established 1981 Advanced Test Equipment Rentals www.atecorp.com 800-404-ATEC (2832) Agilent 2-Port and 4-Port PNA-X Network Analyzer N5249A - 10 MHz to 8.5 GHz N5241A - 10 MHz to 13.5 GHz N5242A - 10

More information

Agilent 86030A 50 GHz Lightwave Component Analyzer Product Overview

Agilent 86030A 50 GHz Lightwave Component Analyzer Product Overview Agilent 86030A 50 GHz Lightwave Component Analyzer Product Overview 2 Characterize 40 Gb/s optical components Modern lightwave transmission systems require accurate and repeatable characterization of their

More information

X-Parameters with Active and Hybrid Active Load Pull

X-Parameters with Active and Hybrid Active Load Pull X-Parameters with Active and Hybrid Active Load Pull Gary Simpson, CTO Maury Microwave EuMW 2012 www.maurymw.com 1 General Load Pull Overview 2 Outline 1. Introduction to Maury Microwave 2. Basics and

More information

Banded Milimeter Wave Network Analysis TECHNICAL OVERVIEW

Banded Milimeter Wave Network Analysis TECHNICAL OVERVIEW Banded Milimeter Wave Network Analysis TECHNICAL OVERVIEW Banded Measurement Solutions to 1.5 THz Keysight offers a variety of banded millimeter-wave solutions that enable the PNA/ PNA-X network analyzers

More information

Reflectometer Series:

Reflectometer Series: Reflectometer Series: R54, R60 & R140 Vector Network Analyzers Clarke & Severn Electronics Ph +612 9482 1944 Email sales@clarke.com.au BUY NOW - www.cseonline.com.au KEY FEATURES Patent: US 9,291,657 No

More information

Keysight Technologies PNA Family Microwave Network Analyzers

Keysight Technologies PNA Family Microwave Network Analyzers Keysight Technologies PN Family Microwave Network nalyzers (N522x/3x/4x) Configuration Guide The -models of the PN family (N522x/3x/4x) will be discontinued June 2019. Their -model replacements are available

More information

Power Meter. Measurement Guide. for Anritsu RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments BTS Master Site Master Spectrum Master Cell Master

Power Meter. Measurement Guide. for Anritsu RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments BTS Master Site Master Spectrum Master Cell Master Measurement Guide Power Meter for Anritsu RF and Microwave Handheld Instruments BTS Master Site Master Spectrum Master Cell Master Power Meter Option 29 High Accuracy Power Meter Option 19 Inline Peak

More information

Suitable firmware can be found on Anritsu's web site under the instrument library listings.

Suitable firmware can be found on Anritsu's web site under the instrument library listings. General Caution Please use a USB Memory Stick for firmware updates. Suitable firmware can be found on Anritsu's web site under the instrument library listings. If your existing firmware is older than v1.19,

More information

Keysight Technologies N1918A Power Analysis Manager and U2000 Series USB Power Sensors. Demo Guide

Keysight Technologies N1918A Power Analysis Manager and U2000 Series USB Power Sensors. Demo Guide Keysight Technologies N1918A Power Analysis Manager and U2000 Series USB Power Sensors Demo Guide Introduction This demonstration guide helps you to get familiar with the basic setup and configuration

More information

Keysight M9485A PXIe Multiport Vector Network Analyzer

Keysight M9485A PXIe Multiport Vector Network Analyzer Keysight M9485A PXIe Multiport Vector Network Analyzer 02 Keysight M9485A PXIe Multiport Vector Network Analyzer - Brochure High-Performance PXI Multiport Vector Network Analyzer (VNA) Innovative solution

More information

Using the FREQUENCY CONVERSION Mode of Vector Network Analyzer ZVR

Using the FREQUENCY CONVERSION Mode of Vector Network Analyzer ZVR Using the FREQUENCY CONVERSION Mode of Vector Network Analyzer ZVR Application Note 1EZ47_0E Subject to change January 1999, Albert Gleissner Products: ZVRL, ZVRE, ZVR, ZVC, ZVCE with Option ZVR-B4 1 ABSTRACT...

More information

A New Noise Parameter Measurement Method Results in More than 100x Speed Improvement and Enhanced Measurement Accuracy

A New Noise Parameter Measurement Method Results in More than 100x Speed Improvement and Enhanced Measurement Accuracy MAURY MICROWAVE CORPORATION March 2013 A New Noise Parameter Measurement Method Results in More than 100x Speed Improvement and Enhanced Measurement Accuracy Gary Simpson 1, David Ballo 2, Joel Dunsmore

More information

Keysight Technologies PNA Microwave Network Analyzers The standard in microwave network analysis

Keysight Technologies PNA Microwave Network Analyzers The standard in microwave network analysis Keysight Technologies PNA Microwave Network Analyzers The standard in microwave network analysis Welcome to the world of PNAs The most popular microwave network analyzers The PNA family builds on Keysight

More information

Keysight Technologies 8 Hints for Making Better Measurements Using RF Signal Generators. Application Note

Keysight Technologies 8 Hints for Making Better Measurements Using RF Signal Generators. Application Note Keysight Technologies 8 Hints for Making Better Measurements Using RF Signal Generators Application Note 02 Keysight 8 Hints for Making Better Measurements Using RF Signal Generators - Application Note

More information

Vector Network Analyzer

Vector Network Analyzer Vector Network Analyzer VNA Basics VNA Roadshow Budapest 17/05/2016 Content Why Users Need VNAs VNA Terminology System Architecture Key Components Basic Measurements Calibration Methods Accuracy and Uncertainty

More information

Keysight Technologies Basics of RF Ampliier Measurements with the E5072A ENA Series Network Analyzer

Keysight Technologies Basics of RF Ampliier Measurements with the E5072A ENA Series Network Analyzer Keysight Technologies Basics of RF Ampliier Measurements with the E5072A ENA Series Network Analyzer Application Note Introduction The RF power ampliier is a key component used in a wide variety of industries

More information

Keysight Technologies FieldFox Handheld Analyzers

Keysight Technologies FieldFox Handheld Analyzers Keysight Technologies FieldFox Handheld Analyzers 4/6.5/9/14/18/26.5/32/44/50 GHz Data Sheet N9913A N9914A N9915A N9925A N9935A N9916A N9926A N9936A N9917A N9927A N9937A N9918A N9928A N9938A N9950A N9951A

More information

On-Wafer Noise Parameter Measurements using Cold-Noise Source and Automatic Receiver Calibration

On-Wafer Noise Parameter Measurements using Cold-Noise Source and Automatic Receiver Calibration Focus Microwaves Inc. 970 Montee de Liesse, Suite 308 Ville St.Laurent, Quebec, Canada, H4T-1W7 Tel: +1-514-335-67, Fax: +1-514-335-687 E-mail: info@focus-microwaves.com Website: http://www.focus-microwaves.com

More information

Keysight Technologies FieldFox Handheld Analyzers

Keysight Technologies FieldFox Handheld Analyzers Keysight Technologies FieldFox Handheld Analyzers 4/6.5/9/14/18/26.5/32/44/50 GHz Data Sheet N9913A N9914A N9915A N9925A N9935A N9916A N9926A N9936A N9917A N9927A N9937A N9918A N9928A N9938A N9950A N9951A

More information

Pulsed Measurement Capability of Copper Mountain Technologies VNAs

Pulsed Measurement Capability of Copper Mountain Technologies VNAs Introduction Pulsed S-parameter measurements are important when testing a DUT at a higher power than it can handle without damage in the steady state, or when the normal operating mode of the DUT involves

More information

Introduction. Part 1. Introduction...2

Introduction. Part 1. Introduction...2 Keysight Technologies Simple Scalar Network Analysis of Frequency Converter Devices using the U2000 USB Power Sensor Series with the ENA Network Analyzer Application Note Introduction This application

More information

Improving Amplitude Accuracy with Next-Generation Signal Generators

Improving Amplitude Accuracy with Next-Generation Signal Generators Improving Amplitude Accuracy with Next-Generation Signal Generators Generate True Performance Signal generators offer precise and highly stable test signals for a variety of components and systems test

More information

FieldFox Handheld Analyzers

FieldFox Handheld Analyzers FieldFox Handheld Analyzers 4/6.5/9/14/18/26.5/32/44/50 GHz N9913A N9914A N9915A N9925A N9935A N9916A N9926A N9936A N9917A N9927A N9937A N9918A N9928A N9938A N9950A N9960A N9951A N9961A N9952A N9962A Find

More information

Abstract: Stringent system specifications impose tough performance requirements on the RF and microwave cables used in aerospace and defense

Abstract: Stringent system specifications impose tough performance requirements on the RF and microwave cables used in aerospace and defense 1 Abstract: Stringent system specifications impose tough performance requirements on the RF and microwave cables used in aerospace and defense communication systems. With typical tools, it can be very

More information

Key Reference. Agilent Technologies E8257D/67D PSG Signal Generators. Manufacturing Part Number: E Printed in USA July 2007

Key Reference. Agilent Technologies E8257D/67D PSG Signal Generators. Manufacturing Part Number: E Printed in USA July 2007 Agilent Technologies E8257D/67D PSG Signal Generators This guide applies to the following signal generator models: E8267D PSG Vector Signal Generator E8257D PSG Analog Signal Generator Due to our continuing

More information

Keysight Technologies PNA and PNA-L Series Microwave Network Analyzers

Keysight Technologies PNA and PNA-L Series Microwave Network Analyzers Ihr Spezialist für Mess- und Prüfgeräte Keysight Technologies PNA and PNA-L Series Microwave Network Analyzers The standard in microwave network analysis datatec Ferdinand-Lassalle-Str. 52 72770 Reutlingen

More information

PN9000 PULSED CARRIER MEASUREMENTS

PN9000 PULSED CARRIER MEASUREMENTS The specialist of Phase noise Measurements PN9000 PULSED CARRIER MEASUREMENTS Carrier frequency: 2.7 GHz - PRF: 5 khz Duty cycle: 1% Page 1 / 12 Introduction When measuring a pulse modulated signal the

More information

Keysight Technologies Compatibility of USB Power Sensors with Keysight Instruments. Application Note

Keysight Technologies Compatibility of USB Power Sensors with Keysight Instruments. Application Note Keysight Technologies Compatibility of USB Power Sensors with Keysight Instruments Application Note Table of Contents Keysight USB Power Sensors 2 USB Power Sensor s Compatibility 3 with Keysight Instruments

More information

Keysight Technologies E5071C ENA Vector Network Analyzer. E5092A Configurable Multiport Test Set

Keysight Technologies E5071C ENA Vector Network Analyzer. E5092A Configurable Multiport Test Set Keysight Technologies E5071C ENA Vector Network Analyzer 9 khz to 4.5/6.5/8.5 GHz 100 khz to 4.5/6.5/8.5 GHz (with bias tees) 300 khz to 14/20 GHz (with bias tees) E5092A Configurable Multiport Test Set

More information

Keysight Technologies PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers

Keysight Technologies PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers Keysight Technologies PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers 02 Keysight PNA-X Series Microwave Network Analyzers - Brochure Industry s Most Advanced RF Test Solution Reach for unrivaled excellence Choose

More information

Traceability and Modulated-Signal Measurements

Traceability and Modulated-Signal Measurements Traceability and Modulated-Signal Measurements Kate A. Remley 1, Dylan F. Williams 1, Paul D. Hale 2 and Dominique Schreurs 3 1. NIST Electromagnetics Division 2. NIST Optoelectronics Division 3. K.U.

More information

LXI -Certified 7mm Automated Tuners

LXI -Certified 7mm Automated Tuners LXI -Certified 7mm Automated Tuners DATA SHEET / 4T-050G07 MODELS: XT982GL01 XT982GL30 XT982AL02 XT-SERIES TUNERS REPRESENT THE NEXT EVOLUTION IN TUNER TECHNOLOGY. FASTER, MORE ACCURATE, MORE REPEATABLE.

More information

Agilent Time Domain Analysis Using a Network Analyzer

Agilent Time Domain Analysis Using a Network Analyzer Agilent Time Domain Analysis Using a Network Analyzer Application Note 1287-12 0.0 0.045 0.6 0.035 Cable S(1,1) 0.4 0.2 Cable S(1,1) 0.025 0.015 0.005 0.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 Frequency (GHz) 0.005

More information